Documentation. HiPath 3000 - 5000 HiPath 3000 Manager C. Communication For The Open Minded. Administrator Documentation A31003-H3580-M101!7!76A9

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 283

Documentation

HiPath 3000/5000
HiPath 3000 Manager C
Administrator documentation

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9

Communication for the open minded

Siemens Enterprise Communications


www.siemens-enterprise.com/open
Our Quality and Environmental Management Sys-
tems are implemented according to the require-
ments of the ISO9001 and ISO14001 standard cer-
tified by an external certification company.

Copyright © Siemens Enterprise


Communications GmbH & Co. KG 2010
Hofmannstr. 51, 80200 München
Siemens Enterprise Communications GmbH & Co. KG
is a Trademark Licensee of Siemens AG
Reference No.: A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9
The information provided in this document contains
merely general descriptions or characteristics of
performance which in case of actual use do not
always apply as described or which may change as
a result of further development of the products. An
obligation to provide the respective characteristics
shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of
contract. Availability and technical specifications are
subject to change without notice.
Communication for the open minded OpenScape, OpenStage and HiPath are registered
trademarks of Siemens Enterprise
Communications GmbH & Co. KG.
Siemens Enterprise Communications All other company, brand, product and service
www.siemens-enterprise.com/open names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
asseTOC.fm

Nur für den internen Gebrauch Contents

Contents 0

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.1 Read/write database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.1.2 Security (User administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.1.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.1.4 Password level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2 Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.3 File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3.1 Customer database (CDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.4 Installing and Uninstalling the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5 Brief Guidelines for Starting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Program Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.2 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.3 System View/Net View and Station View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.1.4 Administration area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.1.5 Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2 Copying and Deleting Entries (Drag & Drop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3 Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.4 Table Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.5 Invoking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3 Start and Log-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Logging on to Manager C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
4 Station view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Station Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Station Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Station view: Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.2 Station view: Activated features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.3 Station view: Workpoint Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.4 Station view: Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.2.5 Station view: Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
5 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Open Customer Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Save Customer Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.4 Save Customer Database As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5 Close Customer Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 0-1
asseTOC.fm

Contents Nur für den internen Gebrauch

5.6 Print / Print Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10


5.7 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.8 Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.8.1 Transfer | Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.8.2 Transfer | Communication | Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.8.3 Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.8.4 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.8.5 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.8.6 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Message call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.8.7 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Substitute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.8.8 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.8.9 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Personal week plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.8.10 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: E-mail notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.8.11 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox Configuration: Automatic Call Forwarding. . . . . . . 5-29
5.8.12 Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.8.13 Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations: Display Statistical Data . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.8.14 Maintenance | EVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.8.15 Maintenance | EVM: Initialize mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.8.16 Maintenance | EVM: Execute file operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.8.17 Maintenance | Trace Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
5.8.18 Transfer | Communication | Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.8.19 Security | User administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.8.20 Security | Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.9 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
6 Settings Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Settings | Netwide Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 Stations - Netwide Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2 Settings | Set up station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.2.1 Subscriber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.2.2 Key programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.3 Key programming: Fill/Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.2.4 Key programming: Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.2.5 Terminal hw sw version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.2.6 Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.3 Settings | Cordless (Not in the USA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.3.1 Cordless | System-wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.3.2 Cordless | SLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.4 Settings | Least Cost Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.4.1 Flags and COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.4.2 Dial plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.4.3 Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.5 Settings | Incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6.5.1 Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.5.2 Call forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
0-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
asseTOC.fm

Nur für den internen Gebrauch Contents

6.5.3 Groups/hunt groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56


6.5.4 Groups/Hunt groups | External destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.5.5 UCD groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.5.6 MULAP groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6.6 Settings | Classes of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.6.1 Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
6.6.2 Day or Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
6.6.3 Allowed/Denied numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
6.6.4 Autom. night service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.6.5 Special days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
6.6.6 autom. COS changeover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6.7 Settings | System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
6.7.1 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
6.7.2 Intercept / Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
6.7.3 Speed dialing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
6.7.4 Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
6.7.5 Daylight saving time/DISA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.8 Settings | Auxiliary equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
6.8.1 Ext. connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
6.8.2 Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
6.8.3 IVM | Parameter/Mailbox Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
6.8.4 IVM | Parameter/COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
6.8.5 IVM | Additional Settings/General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
6.8.6 IVM | Additional settings/Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
6.8.7 IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
6.8.8 IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
6.8.9 IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
6.8.10 IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
6.8.11 EVM (Entry Voice Mail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
6.8.12 EVM | Additional settings/General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
6.8.13 EVM | Additional settings / Automatic attendant: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
7 System Status Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 System-wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Loadware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.1.3 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.1.4 Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.1.5 Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.1.6 Line states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.1.7 System texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.1.8 UCD Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.2 Call charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.2.1 Stations (Not in the USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.2.2 Trunks (Not in the USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 0-3
asseTOC.fm

Contents Nur für den internen Gebrauch

7.2.3 Factors (Not in the USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19


7.2.4 Account codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
8 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Run Wizard (HiPath 3000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Starting the S0 Wizard (HiPath 500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
9 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Program Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.1 Program options General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.2 Program options Save options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.1.3 Program options Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.1.4 Program options ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.2 Password Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.3 Change Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
10 Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Using Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.3 Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
0-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
intro.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction

1 Introduction
HiPath 3000 Manager CAdministrator documentation

HiPath 3000 Manager is the administration program for the following communication systems:
● Hicom 150 E Office
● Hicom 150 H
● HiPath 3000
● HiPath AllServe
● HiPath 5000
● HiPath 500
● HiPath 2000
● HiPath OpenOffice EE
This administration manual is intended for anyone who are responsible for the administration
and management of one of the above communication systems. All the important information
needed to operate the HiPath 3000 Manager administration program can be found here:
● If you already have HiPath 3000 Manager installed and want to start working with it imme-
diately, go to Chapter 3, “ Start and Log-on”.
● Chapter 2, “Operation”, describes the user interface of HiPath 3000 Manager.
● This chapter describes the basic functions of HiPath 3000 Manager.
The help for HiPath 3000 Manager describes all available functions for all supported communi-
cation systems. If you cannot access certain functions, this is most likely due to the fact that
these functions are not supported by the selected communication system. HiPath 3000 Man-
ager automatically shows you only those functions which are supported by the selected com-
munication system.

Requirements
All hardware components of the communication system have been installed and connected.
HiPath 3000 Manager must have been installed on your PC by you or by authorized service
personnel. Your PC must have a CD-ROM or DVD drive for this.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 1-1
intro.fm

Introduction Nur für den internen Gebrauch

If you are using Windows NT/2000/XP/2003, note that the access rights of the cur-
> rent account may not be sufficient for the installation and operation of HiPath 3000
Manager.
If this is the case, HiPath 3000 Manager must be installed and operated under an
account that has the appropriate system access rights.
If you are not sure about your access rights, contact your system administrator.
Note that the power management feature on your PC should not be active when transferring
customer databases to and from the communication system.

Contents of this chapter


Section 1.1, “Basic Functions”, on page 1-3
Section 1.2, “Wizard”, on page 1-8
Section 1.3, “File Types”, on page 1-9
Section 1.4, “Installing and Uninstalling the Software”, on page 1-11
Section 1.5, “Brief Guidelines for Starting Up”, on page 1-12

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
1-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
intro.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction
Basic Functions

1.1 Basic Functions


Besides the usual management options provided via the User administration, you can also
manage the communication system via the Settings (a list of the communication systems sup-
ported by the program can be obtained via Help/About). The capabilities offered by the pro-
gram are determined by the Password level.

A detailed description of the HiPath 3000/5000 communication system can be found


> in the "HiPath 3000/5000, System Reference Manual".
A detailed description of all available features can be found in the manual "HiPath
3000/5000, Feature Description".

Basic functions
Section 1.1.1, “Read/write database”, on page 1-4
Section 1.1.2, “Security (User administration)”, on page 1-5
Section 1.1.3, “Settings”, on page 1-7
Section 1.1.4, “Password level”, on page 1-7

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 1-3
intro.fm

Introduction Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Basic Functions

1.1.1 Read/write database

General Procedure
1. The configuration of the communication system is read via the menu item File/Transfer/
Communication/Read/write database/System -> PC and is then stored as the customer
database in your PC’s main memory.
2. This customer database can now be administered using the Settings menu and can also
be stored on the hard disk for later use.
3. In order to enable the implemented settings, the database is transferred back to the com-
munication system via the menu item PC -> System.

The transfer from the PC -> System overwrites all previous communication system
> settings.

Delta mode
When Delta mode is activated, only changes made since the customer database was last
downloaded are written to the communication system. If, for example, only a station name is
changed, then the transmission time is drastically reduced.
To determine the delta data, the program compares the loaded customer database with the file
lastload.kds, which is automatically created after every transfer from the System -> PC and
is stored on the hard disk.

See also:
– Section 5.8, “Transfer”, on page 5-11
– Section 5.8.1, “Transfer | Communication”, on page 5-12

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
1-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
intro.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction
Basic Functions

1.1.2 Security (User administration)

User administration
The access parameters between the program and the communication system are defined via
the user administration (File/Transfer/Communication/Security/User administration). Up to
16 users (= administrators) can be entered. A user is identified by his or her name. The estab-
lishment of a user group defines the usage rights of the respective user. Authentication is car-
ried out by means of a password.
Two user names and the user groups linked to them, which are relevant for the administration,
are preset in the default setting of the user administration:
– User name “31994” with the user group “Service”
As long as no other user groups are set up, this user group has the access rights to all
administrable system data and the execute rights for all actions available in the sys-
tem. Excluded from this are access rights that are reserved for the development (see
user group “Development”).
– User name “633423” or “office” with the user group “Customer”
The user group ‘Customer’ has access to all data that is intended for administration by
the customer (see also further below).
– User name “*95” with the user group “none”
As long as no other user groups other than the one described above are set up, it is
possible to administer customer-relevant data using the telephone with this user group
(due t o compatibility reasons with Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 1.0). This entry has no
meaning for the communication system administration with HiPath 3000 Manager.
User access rights can be determined by specifying one of the 6 user groups available.
– User group <none>
This user group has no meaning when using the program for administration.
– The user group User admin
This user group has the access rights to the User administration dialog, where the
user and the linked user groups are set up.
– The user group Revision
This user group has the access rights to the Security protocol dialog.
– User group Service
By default, only the user “31994” exists (see further below).
– The user group Administration (Customer)
By default, only the user “633423” exists (see further above).
This user group can access data that is intended for administration by the customer.
This customer data can, however, also be additionally set up by the service. An excep-
tion is the confidential customer data, which may be handled only by the customer:

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 1-5
intro.fm

Introduction Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Basic Functions

– PIN code (only relevant for administration on the system telephone)


– Individual speed dialing facility (only relevant for administration on the system
telephone)
– Contents of the name keys of system telephones
– Central speed dial destinations
– Call charge data per station and per line
– The user group Call charges
has the access rights to the data from call detail recording, call charge data records
and the call detail counter. If this user group is not set up, the rights belong to the cus-
tomer user group. If the customer is not set up either, they belong to the service user
group.
– User group Development
In addition to the access rights of the service user group, the Development user group
has the possibility of administering additional data in the communication system.

See also:
– Section 5.8, “Transfer”, on page 5-11
– Section 5.8.1, “Transfer | Communication”, on page 5-12
– Section 5.8.19, “Security | User administration”, on page 5-46
– Section 5.8.20, “Security | Protocol”, on page 5-48

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
1-6 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
intro.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction
Basic Functions

1.1.3 Settings
The Settings option is used to administer the customer database currently loaded in the program.
In order to enable the implemented settings, the customer database is transferred to the commu-
nication system via the menu item File | Transfer | Communication | Read/write database | PC
-> System .

See also:
– Chapter 4, “Station view”
– Chapter 6, “Settings Menu”

1.1.4 Password level


The password level determines the administration options of the CDB or the communication
system.
The identification and authentication procedure has been altered significantly as of Hicom 150
E Office Rel. 2.
– Up to and including Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 1.0
The entered code for starting the program is immediately verified (against the pass-
words specified for the program). The user is then assigned the corresponding rights.
The user name is not used.
– As of Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 2.0
The user name and password are checked against the customer database or the com-
munication system. This means that the user name and password can only be entered
here; the check, however, is only implemented after call setup or when a customer da-
tabase has been opened.

See also:
– Section 1.1.2, “Security (User administration)”, on page 1-5
– Section 9.2, “Password Level”, on page 9-12

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 1-7
intro.fm

Introduction Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Wizard

1.2 Wizard
The Wizard provides a guided dialog for entering the most important customer data. The cus-
tomer data that is needed for an initial startup is collected here and then transferred to the cus-
tomer database (CDB) of the communication system. Please note, however, that the Wizard
only collects the most important customer data that is needed for a fast startup. Detailed entries
can be processed later in HiPath 3000 Manager.
The Wizard can be started with Tools | Run Wizard (for HiPath 3000) or with Tools | Run S0
Wizard (HiPath 500).

The Wizard can also be run more than once. Note that in such cases, the currently
> loaded CDB is taken into account in the Wizard. In other words, all features which
were set up later using HiPath 3000 Manager and which are not handled via the di-
alogs of the Wizard are retained.
Follow the instructions given in the user interface after you have started the Wizard.
After the Wizard has been run, you can optionally carry out additional settings in the HiPath
3000 Manager in order to optimize your communication system to suit your purposes.
Once you have modified the customer data, you still must transfer it to the communication sys-
tem. On completion of this step, the communication system is ready for operation.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
1-8 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
intro.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction
File Types

1.3 File Types


The following types of files exist:
– *.cdb, Customer database
– *.fst, Application Processor System (APS)
As of Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 2.2:
– *.lng, Loadable texts (languages)
– *.net, NET files, Central Database for networked systems on the HiPath 5000 server
The program tool will not recognize files with other extensions as databases.

Topic
Section 1.3.1, “Customer database (CDB)”, on page 1-10

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 1-9
intro.fm

Introduction Nur für den internen Gebrauch


File Types

1.3.1 Customer database (CDB)


The customer database (CDB) contains all customized settings of the communication system.
You can use the HiPath 3000 Manager to edit the CDB. The CDB data is generated on your PC
in a file with the extension *.kds and then transferred to the communication system when you
are done editing.
After selecting the software version (Version) and the system type (Expansion), a new empty
CDB can be created via File/New. The individual cards are configured via System Status/
Cards.

Please note that the CDB should always be first transferred from the communication
> system. This ensures that the data that you edit always reflects the current status.
Nevertheless, you should still save the CDB on a data medium just to be on the safe
side.

See also:
– Section 1.1.1, “Read/write database”, on page 1-4
– Section 1.3, “File Types”, on page 1-9
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
1-10 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
intro.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction
Installing and Uninstalling the Software

1.4 Installing and Uninstalling the Software

Installation
1. Insert the installation CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If your CD-ROM drive is configured with an Autostart function, the CD menu will open au-
tomatically. If the CD menu does not open automatically, select Start | Run and then use
the Browse button to find and execute the file
<CD-drive>:\setup.exe.
2. Select the menu item Installation from the CD menu.
3. Then select the menu item HiPath 3000 Manager from the following menu.
4. This starts up the installation wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the
installation.
5. When the procedure has finished, you are notified that the installation has been success-
fully performed.
Confirm the message with the OK button.
The program has been installed.

Uninstallation
1. First close/exit the HiPath 3000 Manager (if not already closed).
2. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel.
3. Double-click the Software symbol in the Control Panel window.
4. Select the "HiPath 3000 Manager" entry in the list of installed programs and click the Add/
Remove button.
5. Confirm the security query with the Yes button.
6. The program data is now removed from your PC.
Wait for this procedure to be completed.
7. When the procedure has finished, you are notified that uninstallation has been successfully
performed.
Confirm the message with the OK button.
The program has been uninstalled.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 1-11
intro.fm

Introduction Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Brief Guidelines for Starting Up

1.5 Brief Guidelines for Starting Up


The following steps are needed to start up the communication system:
● Install communication system (by authorized service personnel)
● Connect terminals
● Connect PCs to communication system (e.g., via serial interface)
● Start the CD included in the delivery and install HiPath 3000 Manager on the PC
● Start HiPath 3000 Manager
● Transfer CDB from the communication system to the PC (File | Transfer)
● Optimize CDB in HiPath 3000 Manager
– Configure station (Settings | Set up station, Station or Stationview)
– Configure lines (Settings | Lines/networking, Lines and Routes)
– Swapping/Replacing Languages, if necessary (File | Transfer, Loadable texts)
● Print out label sheets for system telephone(s) (e.g. optiPoint 500)
(Settings | Set up station, Key programming, Labeling )
● Save CDS (File | Save customer database as)
● Transfer CDB from the PC back to the communication system (File | Transfer)

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
1-12 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
usage.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Operation

2 Operation
This chapter is intended to familiarize you with the operation of HiPath 3000 Manager.

Contents of this chapter


Section 2.1, “Program Window”, on page 2-2
Section 2.1.1, “Menu bar”, on page 2-4
Section 2.1.2, “Toolbar”, on page 2-5
Section 2.1.3, “System View/Net View and Station View”, on page 2-7
Section 2.1.4, “Administration area”, on page 2-9
Section 2.1.5, “Status bar”
Section 2.2, “Copying and Deleting Entries (Drag & Drop)”, on page 2-11
Section 2.3, “Context Menu”, on page 2-12
Section 2.4, “Table Handling”, on page 2-13
Section 2.5, “Invoking Help”, on page 2-15

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 2-1
usage.fm

Operation Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Window

2.1 Program Window


After you start HiPath 3000 Manager and log on successfully (see Chapter 3, “ Start and Log-
on”), the program window appears. The display is optimized for a screen resolution of
1024 x 768 pixel.
The information that is displayed in the separate areas of the program window can differ, de-
pending on the program status.
The following representation of the user interface gives an example of the program window.
The exact display depends on the hardware components in use. The display in your program
window may therefore differ.

Menu bar selected CDB Toolbar

System-/Stationview Administration area Status bar

Figure 2-1 The Program Window

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
2-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
usage.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Operation
Program Window

In the program window you will find:


Menu bar
Toolbar
System View/Net View and Station View
Administration area
Status bar

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 2-3
usage.fm

Operation Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Window

2.1.1 Menu bar


The functions of HiPath 3000 Manager can be accessed via the menu bar. When you click the
left mouse button on one of the menu items, the menu opens, and you can then select the func-
tions.

The following items can be found on the menu bar:


File Menu
Settings Menu
System Status Menu
Tools Menu
Options Menu
Options Menu
Help Menu

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
2-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
usage.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Operation
Program Window

2.1.2 Toolbar
You can use the toolbar to start important functions directly and quickly; these functions are
also available on the menu bar. Some icons allow you to reach other functions if you click the
triangle to the right of the icon.

The following items can be found on the toolbar:


(from left to right)
Open Customer Database

Close Customer Database

Save Customer Database

Transfer

Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server

Settings | Netwide Data

Settings | Set up station

Settings | Cordless (Not in the USA)

Settings | Least Cost Routing

Settings | Incoming calls

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 2-5
usage.fm

Operation Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Window

The following items can be found on the toolbar:


(from left to right)
Settings | Classes of service

Settings | System Parameters

Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Call charges

Help Topics

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
2-6 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
usage.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Operation
Program Window

2.1.3 System View/Net View and Station View


The configuration of the communication system occurs via the System, Net and Station views.
The system view shows the configuration from the viewpoint of the hardware / boards. If a net-
work CDB has been loaded, the system view changes to the net view and includes all systems
of the network. The station view can be used to obtain a quick overview of all configured sta-
tions. You can optionally switch between the various views by using the Systemview, Netview
and Stationview buttons.
You can scale the width of the views area freely, even to the extent of making it completely in-
visible. To adjust the size, proceed in the same way as described for changing the column width
in tables (see Section 2.4, “Table Handling”, on page 2-13).

System View and Net View


The system/net view includes navigation trees for all opened CDBs. The navigation tree pro-
vides you with quick access to the menu functions Settings and System Status (see also Sec-
tion 2.1.1, “Menu bar”, on page 2-4). You can expand or collapse individual branches of the tree
by clicking the + or - symbol before the relevant entries in the navigation tree. For each opened
CDB, a separate branch is created in the navigation tree. When a network CDB is loaded, the
branches for each CDB are initially collapsed.

Station view
The station view contain a table (station selection) with the call numbers and names of all sta-
tions. If a network CDB is loaded, the station view includes all stations in the network. Inactive
stations are shown in gray. In the case of groups, a group icon is additionally displayed before
the station name.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 2-7
usage.fm

Operation Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Window

You can select a station via the Station selection. The station parameters for the selected sta-
tion are displayed in the right window pane (see also Section 4.2, “Station Parameters”, on
page 4-3). The stations are sorted in ascending or descending order by one of the columns
(Call no. or Name). You can change the sorting order by clicking the column headers.
The Search no. and Search Name fields/drop-down lists can be used to find a particu+lar sta-
tion. To do this, enter a call number or a name in the fields or select an entry from the drop-
down lists. As you enter each character, the first (or closest) hit in the table is highlighted and
can be made visible by moving the table. In this case, the table is automatically sorted in as-
cending order by the call number or name. On pressing the Enter key, the highlighted station
is selected, and the station parameters/details for that station are displayed in the right window
pane.
Due to system restrictions, not all parameters in the station view can be set for the selected
station. This applies, in particular, to the call numbers, groups and forwarding. The arrow sym-
bol on the right next to each parameter enables you to directly access the dialog box in which
the corresponding parameter can be set.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
2-8 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
usage.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Operation
Program Window

2.1.4 Administration area


The Administration area displays the dialogs in which settings for the communication system
can be made. A detailed list of the communication systems supported by HiPath 3000 Manager
can be found by selecting Help/About...).

Tabs bar

Button bar

Tabs bar
The tabs can be used to switch between the dialogs of the respective functions. You can also
open the individual tabbed pages directly via the Toolbar (see also Section 2.1.2, “Toolbar”, on
page 2-5) or the Navigation tree (see Section 2.1.3, “System View/Net View and Station View”,
on page 2-7).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 2-9
usage.fm

Operation Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Window

Button bar

Button Description
Reset Discards the changes and restores the settings to the applicable values on
call up the dialog box.
Apply Accepts the changes into the opened CDB. Note that the changes will only
take effect in the communication system after the CDB has been trans-
ferred back to the system.
Help displays the help text for the open dialog.

To avoid data loss, especially in cases where you have made many changes, you
> should also use the File/Save customer database or File/Save customer data-
base as function to ensure that your changes are also written to the file.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
2-10 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
usage.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Operation
Copying and Deleting Entries (Drag & Drop)

2.1.5 Status bar


The status bar provides you with additional brief information on the status of HiPath 3000 Man-
ager.
The status bar consists of 4 areas:

Area Description
Info This area is used to display program messages and additional information,
e.g., on the selected function.
CAPS Status of Caps Lock key
NUM Status of the Num Lock key

2.2 Copying and Deleting Entries (Drag & Drop)


You can copy and delete entries easily by using the “drag & drop” technique (“click and drag”):
1. To do this, first click on any entry that you want to copy or delete by using the left mouse
button.
2. You can now drag the entry while holding down the left mouse button to the field to which
it is to be copied.
3. To delete the contents of a field, drag and drop the entry onto the icon for the Recycle Bin.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 2-11
usage.fm

Operation Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Context Menu

2.3 Context Menu


If you right-click certain areas in the windows (e.g., in tables), a context menu appears with dif-
ferent menu items that are suited to the current situation. Two sample context menus are de-
scribed below.

Example Context menu in tables

Delete Marked areas are deleted.


Copy Marked areas are copied to the clipboard.
Paste Marked areas are pasted from the clipboard into the table.
Sort ascending The table is sorted in ascending order according to the marked column.
Sort descending The table is sorted in descending order according to the marked column.
Sort logical Sorting as with the older Hicom Assistant versions.

Example Context menu in key programming

Delete The selected key of all selected stations is cleared.


Clear all All keys of all selected stations are cleared.
Copy The currently selected key of the selected station is copied.
Copy all All keys of the selected station are copied.
Paste For all marked terminals, the keys copied earlier are copied over to the
currently selected station. Multiple stations may be selected (using the
Shift or Ctrl key).
Fill/Delete: The dialog will offer options for filling in the keys (only for busy lamp
fields).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
2-12 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
usage.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Operation
Table Handling

2.4 Table Handling


All tables are handled in the same way when changing entries or the appearance of the table.

Changing entries in tables


1. Use the left mouse button to select the field to be changed (click the field).
2. Place the mouse pointer at the entry you want to change and enter the changes. The pre-
vious contents are retained.
3. Click the Apply button.
or
1. Use the left mouse button to click twice on the field to be changed (double- click the field).
2. Enter the changes. The previous contents are completely overwritten.
3. Click the Apply button.

The table entries in some tables cannot be changed.


>
Sorting tables
1. With the left mouse button, click the header of the column that you want to use for sorting
the table. The table can be sorted via the header in ascendind, descending and partly in
logical order.
or
1. Click the header of the column that you want to use for sorting the table. The column is
selected.
2. With the right mouse button, click on the selected column (right-click the selected column).
The context menu is displayed.
3. Select the type of sorting from the context menu.

Some tables cannot be sorted.


> Due to the sorting of the table, it is conceivable that important table entries may only
appear at the end of the table.
The sorting method applies to the relevant table regardless of the opened CDB and
remains in effect even after exiting HiPath 3000 Manager.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 2-13
usage.fm

Operation Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Table Handling

Changing column width


1. In the table header, guide the mouse pointer over the column marking to the right of the
column whose width you want to change (or between two columns). The mouse pointer
changes to a column identifier.
2. Click the left mouse button. While holding the mouse button down, drag the mouse to the
right or left to change the column width.
3. You can also use this function on several columns at once. To do this, select several col-
umns with the "Shift" key and the left mouse button. Click the header.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
2-14 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
usage.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Operation
Invoking Help

2.5 Invoking Help


HiPath 3000 Manager offers you multiple ways to invoke help.
● If you want to start the help without starting HiPath 3000 Manager, select Start/Programs/
HiPath 3000 Manager/HiPath 3000 Manager Help.
Alternatively,
● you can start the help from within HiPath 3000 Manager via Help/Help contents or via the
Help icon in the toolbar.

Context-sensitive help
HiPath 3000 Manager assists you in the process of editing settings by means of a context-sen-
sitive help.
● Press the F1 key on your keyboard to obtain specific help on the current tab/dialog.
or
● Click the Help button from within the current tabbed page or dialog box.
In addition, brief information is also displayed in the status bar (see Section 2.1.5, “Status bar”,
on page 2-11).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 2-15
usage.fm

Operation Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Invoking Help

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
2-16 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
start.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Start and Log-on
Logging on to Manager C

3 Start and Log-on


Start the HiPath 3000 Manager using:
Start/Programs/HiPath 3000 Manager/HiPath 3000 Manager.

If you are using Windows NT/2000, please note that the access rights of the current
> account may not be sufficient.
The HiPath 3000 Manager administration program must be started under an account
that has the appropriate system access rights.
If you are not sure about your access rights, contact your system administrator.

3.1 Logging on to Manager C


The Log-on window is displayed on starting the program.
1. To log on, enter your User name and Password in the corresponding input fields. When
logging onto a HiPath 500 for the first time, enter the default user name “633423” and the
default password ”633423”. In the case of HiPath 3000, use the default user name “office”
and the default password ”office”. More details on user names and passwords can be found
in Section 1.1.2, “Security (User administration)” and Section 1.1.4, “Password level”.
2. Confirm the entries with the OK button.
3. The Program window is displayed. The contents of the window depend on the configuration
of your communication system.

If a password has already been created, please use this. You can change the pass-
> word later via Options/Change password.
When entering your password, note that it is case-sensitive!

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 3-1
start.fm

Start and Log-on Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Logging on to Manager C

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
3-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view

4 Station view
The Station view shows all stations and their parameters in the communication system. Most
of the parameters for each individual station in the communication system can be defined via
the station view.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Station Selection
● Station Parameters
– Station view: Flags
– Station view: Activated features
– Station view: Workpoint Client
– Station view: Groups
– Station view: Forwarding

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-1
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Selection

4.1 Station Selection


The Station selection consists of a table with the columns "Call no." and "Name". The Search
no. and Search Name fields/drop-down lists can be used to find specific stations. Selecting a
station in the table causes the parameters of the selected station to be displayed on the right.

Search no.
The Search no. drop-down list can be used to find a particular call number. You can select one
of the call numbers already entered in the drop-down list or enter the call number that you want
to find directly into the field. The station to be located is marked in the table, and the parameters
are shown on the right.

Search Name
The Search Name drop-down list can be used to find a particular station name. You can select
one of the names already entered in the drop-down list or enter the name that you want to find
directly into the field. The station to be located is marked in the table, and the parameters are
shown on the right.

Call no. (call number) column


The Call no. column contains the internal call number of the relevant station.

Name column
The Name column shows the name associated with the station.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view
Station Parameters

4.2 Station Parameters


On selecting a station in the "Station selection" dialog, the parameters for the selected station
are displayed on the right. You can then edit the parameters for the station via the tabs or view
the status of the station. For parameters that cannot be edited here, you will find a link (arrow
symbol) next to each such parameter that enables you to switch directly to the appropriate di-
alog in the system view where you can then set the parameters as required.

Name
The name assigned to the station is entered here. The name can be a person’s name, the name
of a department or any other suitable entry. The name can contain a maximum of 16 characters.
Note that no validity check is performed for the entered characters, so it is your responsibility
to ensure that only valid characters are used.
The following ISO 8859-1 characters can be entered:
– Character 32 through 127 (the usual West-European characters, digits, letters)
– German Umlauts (Ä, Ö, Ü, ä, ö, ü)
– the characters Å, Æ, Ñ, Ø, Õ, õ.
Characters that are not permitted will be replaced with a space in the display.
When setting language conversion “Greek” or “Cyrillic”, the letters of the Greek or Cyrillic al-
phabet can be entered in capital letters.

Station Number
The internal call number of each station is shown here (see also Subscriber). To change the
call number, click on the arrow symbol after the number.

CLIP/LIN
The valid DID (direct inward dialing) number for CLIP or LIN is shown here (see also Subscrib-
er). To change the call number, click on the arrow symbol after the CLIP/LIN.

Direct inward dialing (DID)


The DID number assigned to the corresponding extension is displayed here (see also Subscrib-
er) To change the DID number, click on the arrow symbol after the DID.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-3
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Parameters

Type
Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
The type of telephone connected to the station port is automatically specified by the communi-
cation system. If a telephone is not connected, No Port is displayed in the column. If an analog
telephone is connected, the column entry is “No Fe”.
– No Port, i.e. no telephone connected
– No Fe, i.e. analog telephone connected
– System telephone connected
– S0 station

Access
Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
The name, number, slot of the station system board and the type of Workpoint Client
(SYS=System, S0) are displayed here. This column also indicates whether the port is a master
or a slave.

Mobile code
The status of the mobile phone and the PIN code to log on the mobile telephone are displayed
here (see also Cordless | SLC, Area: Portable Parts). To change the PIN code, click on the ar-
row symbol after the mobile code.

Tabs for Station Parameters


– Station view: Flags
– Station view: Activated features
– Station view: Workpoint Client
– Station view: Groups
– Station view: Forwarding

See also:
– Section 4.1, “Station Selection”, on page 4-2
– Section 4.2.1, “Station view: Flags”, on page 4-5
– Section 4.2.2, “Station view: Activated features”, on page 4-12
– Section 4.2.3, “Station view: Workpoint Client”, on page 4-15
– Section 4.2.4, “Station view: Groups”, on page 4-16
– Section 4.2.5, “Station view: Forwarding”, on page 4-17
– Section 6.2.1, “Subscriber”, on page 6-9
– Section 6.3.2, “Cordless | SLC”, on page 6-30

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view
Station Parameters

4.2.1 Station view: Flags


You can activate and deactivate station flags and parameters by using Flags. Unlike system
flags, station flags apply only to the station for which they are set.

"Override class of service on" flag


Authorized stations can break into an existing connection with a code or key. The affected sta-
tions are notified of the override by a warning tone (and by a display).

Associated dialing/services flag


The user defines the call number of the destination station in the PC address book and acti-
vates the dialing. The PC executes the associated dialing.
An authorized station can activate or deactivate services for any other station in the communi-
cation system.

Call waiting rejection on flag


This flag disables the call waiting feature. When Call waiting rejection is set, incoming calls for
busy stations are immediately processed in accordance with Call Management (see Settings |
Incoming calls). If this flag is deactivated, an incoming call to a busy internal station is signaled
by a warning tone and, if applicable, on the display.

Headset flag
Each system telephone (digital) can be furnished with a headset after this authorization has
been enabled (connection to the handset connection).
The use of a headset for the system telephone is recognized by the communication system au-
tomatically; an authorization enable is not necessary in this case.
If this flag is set, the station can be equipped with a headset that plugs into the handset con-
nection or into the headset adapter. This allows users to answer calls without lifting the handset
simply by pressing a key.

If this flag is set, calls cannot be made by pressing the speaker key; an enable key
7 must be programmed so that calls can be made.

Override Do Not Disturb flag


If a caller hits a busy extension, the called station is signaled that a call is waiting with the call
waiting tone. If a station with the "Override Do Not Disturb" feature hits a station that has acti-
vated call waiting rejecting, the station can override the Do Not Disturb. The called station can
now accept this call without ending the existing one.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-5
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Parameters

Missed Calls List flag


This flag activates the missed calls list for this station. The missed calls list records calls that
were not answered (terminals with display only). The calls are time-stamped (time and date)
and included in a chronological list. Only calls that also have a call number or a name are re-
corded. If a caller makes several calls, the timestamp of the entry is updated and a call counter
is incremented for the caller.
If a station-specific missed calls list is created for an individual station in a station group, the
station can access both lists as a shared list.
If an external incoming call is routed via the automatic attendant to an internal station and the
station is currently busy or has call forwarding activated, no entry is made to the missed calls
list.

MCID access flag (not in the USA)


This flag allows malicious callers to be traced (MCID, Malicious Call Identification). You must
apply to your public network operator in order to use this feature.

FWD external permitted flag


This flag allows this station to forward calls to an external destination. If call forwarding to an
external destination is permitted, an incoming DID call is connected via two B-channels by the
communication system. External call numbers cannot be entered with the speed dialing fea-
ture; however, a key can be programmed for this purpose. If a key is programmed, the external
station number is stored in the speed dialing pool.
When carrying out external call forwarding, the call charges that arise for the station that initi-
ated the external FWD are displayed on this station’s telephone after the end of the call and are
also recorded in the call detail recording/CDRC.

Compress display data flag


Display outputs are compressed to enhance performance. If the display on a UP0/E terminal
changes, the communication system only updates the difference relative to the previous dis-
play. If an application (e.g. Smartset / TAPI) is connected via an RS 232 adapter (data or control
adapter), this feature must be deactivated.
The flag must be deactivated for applications that obtain the call number information from the
telephone’s display, (i.e., uncompressed output with call number instead of compressed output
with name).
This flag must be disabled manually for system telephones with a Chinese display until
HiPath 3000 V4.0 SMR 7. As of SMR 7, this is no longer required.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-6 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view
Station Parameters

Entry in telephone directory flag


This entry controls whether or not the call number of the station is entered in the telephone di-
rectory. In the case of stations which can only be reached via a group call number (e.g. MU-
LAP), it may not be helpful to record their call numbers in the telephone directory.
On all telephones with a display, you can view the directory of all internal stations with names
and call numbers as well as entries from the SSD (name, destination call number), specifically
search for the required station and then call that station.

Edit tel. number flag


Allows a telephone number to be edited during the input. The editing is possible using the menu
system of a system telephone with display. At the end, Dialing must then be selected. This flag
has no effect when using other devices.

Keypad dial flag


Keypad dial allows for the handling of stimulus procedures to the ISDN CO. The numbers di-
aled in the CO direction are packed in information elements and sent to the CO. Display mes-
sages are sent in the other direction.

Actions carried out with the feature Keypad Dial are not subject to a system control,
7 so that, under certain circumstances, misuse, significant faulty operations, or unno-
ticed or undesired actions that result in liability for payment may occur.

Prevention of voice calling off flag


Voice calling is only possible to internal UP0/E terminals with loudspeakers (also groups) using
the voice calling button or a code. When the flag is set, this station can be called directly, with-
out the called station lifting the handset. This switches on the loudspeaker at the destination
station. If the flag is not set, the incoming speaker call is signaled as a normal call at the station.

Codelock intercept flag


If the code lock for a station is active and a trunk group code is dialed from that station, the call
is immediately forwarded to the intercept destination entered here. Therefore, when dialing a
number for which the station has no authorization, the call is signaled by the station call number
entered under Intercept / Attendant.

DISA class of service flag


This flag allows station ports to activate Direct Inward System Access services, (Mobility Entry
stations do not require DISA authorization) such as send info texts, activate or deactivate ac-
tuators, or activate or deactivate night service.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-7
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Parameters

Otherwise a fundamental authorization for the use of the DISA features is allocated for all in-
ternal ports (call numbers) using the system administration in the customer database: feature
activation in the communication system via an external call. Furthermore, with DISA, it is pos-
sible to make an outgoing external connection via the incoming external connection.

Door release DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) flag


If this flag is set, the station can open a door with the DTMF/MFV code signaling when a door
relay is connected to the relevant port.

Autom. connection, CSTA flag


Calls set up over the CSTA server can optionally work with or without auto answer at the orig-
inating device. Setting the flag causes the auto answer to be activated.

Ringback protection flag (only specific countries)


This flag can be activated in Brazil, Indonesia, Malaysia and Singapore.
(only relevant if ringback calls are offered by the telecommunication provider)
This feature makes it possible to set up ringback protection individually for each station, thus
making it possible to automatically refuse incoming ringback calls. This also applies in the case
of call forwarding, call pickup, an intercept, etc.
If this flag is set, ringback protection is activated when the station is called via MFC-R2 DID
(Brazil, Malaysia and Singapore)/SMFC DID (Indonesia). This also applies to call forwarding,
call pickup, intercept, etc.

Transit allowed via Hook-on flag


This flag activates the transfer of an external call to an external station when the handset is re-
placed.
This flag also affects the behavior in a conference (see HiPath 3000/5000, Feature Description,
Conference):
The following dependencies apply in a conference:
● If the flag is not set at the station of the conference leader, and the conference leader hangs
up, the entire conference will be terminated, and all connections will be cleared.
● If the flag is set at the station of the conference leader, and the conference leader hangs
up, while other internal users are still participating in the conference, then the person who
has been in the conference for the longest period becomes the new conference leader. If
the new conference leader also hangs up, then the status of his or her "Transit allowed via
Hook-on" flag will determine how the conference proceeds.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-8 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view
Station Parameters

No group ringing on busy flag


The flag is set for the connected station so that the user can thus control which stations in the
call ringing group should be called when the "master” is busy. If several stations have pro-
grammed the same station/Smartset for group ringing, this flag is valid once for all connections
(via all "masters”).
If this flag is not set, group ringing is always implemented (provided the station with group ring-
ing programmed can be reached). This corresponds to the standard behavior.
If the flag is set, group ringing depends on availability of the "master":
– The "master” is free (Immediate group ringing)
– The "master” can be called (Group ringing after 5 seconds)
– The "master” cannot be called/call waiting is not active (No group ringing)

The "master” is the station with group ringing programmed


>
Central busy signaling flag
This flag must be set for stations which have busy signaling on a centralized communication
system.
The implementation of central busy signaling is designed for a maximum of 100 stations per
system (nodes).

Virtual station flag


Virtual ports are used for the signaling of statuses and calls on all systems. This flag can only
be set for station ports for which a physical telephone interface is not available. This port is au-
tomatically activated.
If hardware is available for a particular port, any attempt to configure this port as a virtual station
will be rejected. If a port has already been configured as a virtual station, any cards which are
then plugged will not be activated. Virtual ports have their own internal and external call num-
bers under which they can be reached.
If stations are configured using a virtual station template, the Virtual station flag is only set for
ports which do not have hardware.

"Call prio./immed. tone call wait." flag


By setting this flag (Call priority/immediate tone call waiting), calls through this station are sig-
naled with a higher priority to partners. The priority is set to be the same as that of external calls.
In other words,, the prioritized calls are thus queued before existing internal calls, but after ex-
isting external calls. Note that existing first calls (not waiting calls) are usually never displaced,
regardless of their ring type.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-9
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Parameters

If this flag is set, the caller receives a ring tone immediately instead of a busy tone. This has no
impact on the acoustic signaling. The prioritized calls are still signaled like an internal call.
This feature is important for phonemail connections.

Silent Monitoring flag


With the "Silent Monitoring" feature an authorized subscriber can override an internal subscrib-
er during a conversation, without the person noticing. This feature only works if the station also
has override privileges.

The "Silent Monitoring" feature is not supported in HiPath 540/580. The Silent
> Monitoring flag must be deactivated.

The "Silent Monitoring" feature is enabled in the following countries:


● up to HiPath 3000/5000 V7 SMR 10: USA, IND, SIN, GBR, RSA, IM, BRA, THA, MAL,
NDL, FRA, AUS, NSL, HGK, IRL, ARG, BEL, SPA, POR, CHN
● from HiPath 3000/5000 V8 and HiPath OpenOffice EE V1 R2: all countries

"Display of Emergency text" flag


If this flag is activated, the emergency text specified under Settings | Setup station | Emergency
will be shown on the display in the event of an emergency.

Voice recording flag


If the flag is enabled, the user can activate voice recording during a call. If the IVM is to be used
for voice recording, then the length of the voice recording can be set via IVM | Additional Set-
tings/General, and the appropriate signaling mechanism before initiating the voice recording
can be defined.

Analog Station with CLIP flag


If this flag is activated, the call number for analog stations is transmitted (CLIP = Calling Line
identification Presentation).
The flag can only be used if there are analog ports in the system.
Last destination mailbox active flag
If this flag is activated and the called party is not available, the call is forwarded to the substitute
mailbox and the caller’s number is displayed on the substitute telephone.

Disable handsfree microphone flag


If this flag is activated, the handsfree microphone cannot be used.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-10 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view
Station Parameters

This flag is only supported by OpenStage phones.


>
Language drop-down list
Here you select the language for the display texts created by the communication system for
each station.

Apply flags to ... button


This button allows you to apply the settings you have made for the selected station to one or
more (or all) stations.
To select the stations to which the flags are to be applied, the Apply flags to... dialog box is
displayed. In this dialog, the stations to which the flags are to be applied can be selected in the
first column of the table. If the flags are to be applied to all stations, select the option For all
stations.

See also
– Section 4.1, “Station Selection”, on page 4-2
– Section 4.2, “Station Parameters”, on page 4-3
– Section 4.2.2, “Station view: Activated features”, on page 4-12
– Section 4.2.3, “Station view: Workpoint Client”, on page 4-15
– Section 4.2.4, “Station view: Groups”, on page 4-16
– Section 4.2.5, “Station view: Forwarding”, on page 4-17
– Section 5.8.7, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Substitute”, on page 5-24
– Section 6.7.2, “Intercept / Attendant”, on page 6-82

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-11
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Parameters

4.2.2 Station view: Activated features


Activated features is used to
– display the features currently activated by the station
– reset the PIN of the station
– define the type of terminal device that is attached to each port
– define further parameters such as call signaling, paging, hotline and dialing method

Activated flags
You can see here whether the station has activated or deactivated the corresponding feature.

"System telephone lock reset" option


Activate this option to reset the code for the telephone lock to 00000.

If the station PIN is reset, and the customer database is loaded to the system in Delta
> mode, the PIN number in the communication system is not set to 00000. In order to
transfer a modified PIN number to the communication system, delta mode must be
deactivated and the Call charges switch activated.

Key modules
The number of key modules is displayed here.

Extension Type drop-down list


The extension type for the relevant port is selected in the drop-down list.

Standard This setting is intended for system and analog telephones.


Phone Mail This is used when connecting PhoneMail to a communication system
(call number, 5-dig- with a numbering plan of up to five digits.
it)
Phone Mail This is used when connecting PhoneMail to a communication system
(call number, 6-dig- with a numbering plan of up to six digits.
it)
Answer Machine With this setting, connected calls can be picked up via a DSS key. Be-
sides being selected for answering machines, this entry should also be
selected for pseudo (dummy) ports where no physical equipment has
been set up. This prevents the communication system from checking the
operating status of the port..
Fax Call override is not possible with this setting. It is reserved for fax ma-
chines only.
Loudspeaker This setting facilitates paging via the a/b port.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-12 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view
Station Parameters

Standard This setting is intended for system and analog telephones.


External MOH This setting provides for external music on hold.
P.O. T. MW LED This setting should be selected for standard analog telephones with a
(not in the USA) message-waiting LED.
Door station with This setting should be selected if a terminal with pulse dialing is used.
pulsed loop
Modem Call override is not possible with this setting. It is intended for modems.

When a fax or modem station is deleted (i.e., the call number and DID are deleted),
> the extension type must also be be reset to the default (standard).

"Call signaling extern" drop-down list


Here you can select three ring types for external calls.
– System telephone
Ring type 1 = External call (e.g., double ring)
Ring type 2 = External call CO 2 (e.g., triple ring)
Ring type 3 = External call CO 3 (e.g., short/long/short)
– Analog telephones, Germany:
Ring type 1 = External call
Ring type 2 = Automatic recall
Ring type 3 = Doorbell ring
– Analog telephones, Other countries:
Ring type 1 = External call
Ring type 2 = External call
Ring type 3 = External call

Hotline, Mode, Hotline (Number)


The following options are available for selection in the "Hotline mode" selection list:
– "Off": The feature is deactivated.
– "Off-hook alarm after timeout": The call to the hotline takes place after a predefined
delay (off-hook alarm time). If the subscriber dials a digit before this interval has ex-
pired, the hotline is not called.
– "Hotline": The hotline number is called directly after the receiver is lifted at the tele-
phone in question.
In the Hotline drop-down list, you can set the hotline index (hotline number) to be used at the
relevant station.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-13
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Parameters

Hotline numbers for the indexes and delay intervals can be set via Miscellaneous.
To change these settings, click on the arrow symbol after Hotline.

Payload Security
If this flag and the SPE support system flag are activated, the Signaling & Payload Encryption
(SPE) feature is supported for the selected subscriber(s). This means that the signaling and
payload data is encrypted for this/these subscriber/s.
The subscribers must have one of the following telephones for this: OpenStage CorNet-IP
(HFA), optiPoint 410 (not: optiPoint 410 entry, optiPoint 410 economy), optiPoint 420 (not:
optiPoint 420 economy).
OpenStage TDM features an option for indicating whether or not part of a connection path to
an IP station is encrypted (off = no information is displayed).

For OpenStage TDM it is not possible to encrypt the signaling and voice data along
> the complete connection path.

The payload security setting does not work for any other telephones.

4.2.2.1 Area: Dialing method, DP/DTMF


The signaling method (DP=pulse dialing, DTMF=Dual Tone Multi Frequency) used at the ter-
minal in question is configured here. This feature is only available for analog lines. If a system
telephone is connected, this item is deactivated. Digital phones default to DTMF. DTMF must
be activated for ports configured as answering machines.

See also
– Section 4.1, “Station Selection”, on page 4-2
– Section 4.2, “Station Parameters”, on page 4-3
– Section 4.2.1, “Station view: Flags”, on page 4-5
– Section 4.2.3, “Station view: Workpoint Client”, on page 4-15
– Section 4.2.4, “Station view: Groups”, on page 4-16
– Section 4.2.5, “Station view: Forwarding”, on page 4-17

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-14 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view
Station Parameters

4.2.3 Station view: Workpoint Client


Workpoint Client is used to define the parameters for an IP terminal, e.g., the IP address for
an H.323 or SIP client.

4.2.3.1 Area: System Client

Authentication active flag


You can define here whether this client requires authentication at the LAN card in order to be
used. This is specially relevant in the case of clients who are not on the internal LAN but who
are dialing in from the outside.

Password
If authentication has been activated, enter the password for this client here and confirm your
entry by repeating it.

See also:
– Section 4.1, “Station Selection”, on page 4-2
– Section 4.2, “Station Parameters”, on page 4-3
– Section 4.2.1, “Station view: Flags”, on page 4-5
– Section 4.2.2, “Station view: Activated features”, on page 4-12
– Section 4.2.4, “Station view: Groups”, on page 4-16
– Section 4.2.5, “Station view: Forwarding”, on page 4-17
– Section 6.2.1, “Subscriber”, on page 6-9

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-15
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Parameters

4.2.4 Station view: Groups


Groups can be used to list all the groups in which the selected station is a member.

4.2.4.1 Hunt groups table


This table lists all hunt groups to which the selected stations belong. To edit the Groups/Hunt
groups, click on the arrow symbol after the number.

4.2.4.2 Team/Top table


This Team/Top table lists all Team/Top groups to which the selected stations belong. MULAPs
belonging to the listed Team/Top groups are not shown here. To edit Team/Top, click on the ar-
row symbol after Team/top

4.2.4.3 Area: Class of service groups


The class of service (COS) groups for day and night of the selected station are shown here.
Select a COS group for day or night from the drop-down list to assign it to the station. To edit
the COS groups, click on the arrow symbol after Class of service groups.

4.2.4.4 Area: Call pickup groups


This area shows the call pickup group in which the selected station is a member and the other
members of that group. To assign a station to a call pickup group, select the appropriate call
pickup group from the drop-down list. To edit the call pickup groups, click on the arrow symbol
after Call pickup groups.

See also
– Section 4.1, “Station Selection”, on page 4-2
– Section 4.2, “Station Parameters”, on page 4-3
– Section 4.2.1, “Station view: Flags”, on page 4-5
– Section 4.2.2, “Station view: Activated features”, on page 4-12
– Section 4.2.3, “Station view: Workpoint Client”, on page 4-15
– Section 4.2.5, “Station view: Forwarding”, on page 4-17
– Section 6.5.1, “Call Pickup”, on page 6-51
– Section 6.5.3, “Groups/hunt groups”
– Section 6.6.1, “Station”
– Section 6.6.2, “Day or Night”, on page 6-67

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-16 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
station.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Station view
Station Parameters

4.2.5 Station view: Forwarding


Forwarding can be used to show the status of any call forwarding that may have been set for
the selected station. Under Call forwarding you can view whether the station has been for-
warded to another station and/or is the destination of call forwarding itself.

4.2.5.1 Area: Call forwarding


The current status of the set call forwarding is shown under Status. One of three forwarding
methods can be set here (External, Internal or All). If the field after status is empty, the station
has not enabled any call forwarding.
Under Forwarding destination from, you can view all the (internal) stations that have set the
currently selected station as a call forwarding destination.

4.2.5.2 Area: Ringing group


Under Stations included you can view all the stations that have currently been added by the
selected station to the answer group.
Connection of shows all the stations that have currently added the selected station to an an-
swer group.

4.2.5.3 Area: Call forwarding


The call forwarding details for the selected stations are shown in this field. Use the drop-down
list to select one call dest. list each for Day, Night and Internal, respectively. In the fields below
the drop-down lists, the currently defined call dest. lists are displayed. To edit call detsination
lists, click on the arrow symbol after Call forwarding.

See also
– Section 4.1, “Station Selection”, on page 4-2
– Section 4.2, “Station Parameters”, on page 4-3
– Section 4.2.1, “Station view: Flags”, on page 4-5
– Section 4.2.2, “Station view: Activated features”, on page 4-12
– Section 4.2.3, “Station view: Workpoint Client”, on page 4-15
– Section 4.2.4, “Station view: Groups”, on page 4-16
– Section 6.5.2, “Call forwarding”, on page 6-52

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 4-17
station.fm

Station view Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Station Parameters

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
4-18 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu

5 File Menu

HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe


– Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server
Open Customer Database
Save Customer Database
Save Customer Database As
Close Customer Database
Print / Print Preview
Printer Setup
Transfer
● Transfer | Communication
● Transfer | Communication | Maintenance
– Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)
– Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations
– Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations: Display Statistical Data
– Maintenance | EVM
– Maintenance | EVM: Initialize mailboxes
– Maintenance | EVM: Execute file operations
● Transfer | Communication | Security
– Security | User administration
– Security | Protocol

Exit
Table 5-1 File menu

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-1
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server

5.1 Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server

File | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe | Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server

Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server is used to load the server configuration to Hi-
Path 3000 Manager and to transfer the modified configuration back to the server.

Area: Security

Change password
Opens the Change password in system dialog, via which the current password being used in
all nodes and in the server can be modified. Changes are implemented immediately in all nodes
and in the server.

User administration
Opens the Security | User administration dialog, where the user administrator can define new
users, assign them to a user group, and also delete existing users. Changes are implemented
in all nodes and in the server.

Area: HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server

Area: Server
A server computer can be specified in this field. If this computer is not available, the error mes-
sage PC not found! is displayed. If the server software has not been loaded on this computer,
the error message HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe server not installed on this PC! is displayed.

Browse
The system to be used as the server can be selected via Browse.

Area: Update server from systems

System->Server
Pressing the System->Server button loads the customer data memory from the individual
nodes to the server. The data is then loaded from the server to the main memory of the PC (this
corresponds to the Server->Manager option).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server

Area: Read/write database

Server->Manager, Manager->Server
Server->Manager is used to transfer the customer database from the server to the main mem-
ory of the PC.
Manager->Server is used to load the active customer databases from the PC to the server and
then automatically to the appropriate nodes.
The PC and the server can be the same machine. Depending on the communication system,
the transfer can take between two and six minutes.
Note that a read is always implemented first in order to have an error-free customer database
even if a transmission error should occur.

When a customer database is downloaded from the communication system, it is al-


7 ways assigned the file name HiPathServerDB.net, and the node customer database
is named HiPathServerDBx.kds (where x corresponds to the number of the node in
question).

Delta mode
Delta mode can only be activated if a CDB is already loaded in your PC’s main memory.
When Delta mode is activated, only changes made since the customer database was last
downloaded are written to the communication system. If, for example, only a station name is
changed, then the transmission time is drastically reduced.

Call charges
Pressing the Call charges button causes the contents of a particular memory area (RDI =
ReaD or Init) of the communication system to be overwritten by the customer database. This
data contains values that can be only read or initialized by HiPath 3000 Manager.
It makes sense to select this field when exchanging the motherboard so that all data can be
completely taken over or when resetting the following data in HiPath 3000 Manager:
– Call charges
– Counter for the features activated in the communication system
– Station codelock
The following data is also overwritten:
– External call forwarding destinations
– Activated call forwarding by station
– Messages sent (message waiting)
– Call forwarding destinations
– Code word for the release of the mobile telephone
– Cordless base station data

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-3
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server

Area: Add/Delete Nodes

Add Node, Delete Node


These buttons are only enabled when nodes have been added or deleted. It is only via these
buttons that the changes made are also permanently implemented in the HiPath 5000 server.

See also:
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”
– Section 5.8, “Transfer”, on page 5-11
– Section 5.8.19, “Security | User administration”, on page 5-46

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Open Customer Database

5.2 Open Customer Database

File | Open customer database

The Open customer database dialog box allows you to open a customer database file on your
PC’s hard drive or on a floppy disk.
Once you have opened a customer database, the name of that database is displayed in the title
bar of the application window. This database is now the "active" or "current" database, which
means that any changes you make will apply to this customer database.
Now you can edit the customer database "offline", i.e., the changes that you make do not affect
your communication system as yet. The changes do not become effective until you have trans-
ferred the modified CDB back to the communication system. Make sure that you also save your
changes locally on your hard disk or a diskette.
If you commission authorized service personnel to change the CDB for you via remote service,
be sure to the CDB on your hard disk or on a data medium after this has occurred.

Look in:
By default, the folder set via Options | Program options General is searched for files. You can
change the folder to open a saved CDB.

File name
Name of the CDB. Any customer database that you download from a communication system
to your PC will be called lastload.kds.

File type
For a description of the various file types, see Section 1.3, “File Types”, on page 1-9.
If you select All file types (*.*), all the files which can be opened are displayed.

Notes
This field displays notes that were stored when saving the file.

Info
This field is used to display the customer name, system type, APS stamp and the date when
the selected customer database was last saved.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-5
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Open Customer Database

See also:
– Section 1.3, “File Types”, on page 1-9
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”
– Section 5.5, “Close Customer Database”, on page 5-9
– Section 9.1.1, “Program options General”, on page 9-3

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-6 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Save Customer Database

5.3 Save Customer Database

File | Save customer database

The active CDB can be saved in file via Save customer database. The file extension is always
*.cdb.

When you are saving the CDB for the first time, the dialog box Save Customer Da-
> tabase As is displayed so that you can enter the file name.

If the customer database was manually stored or was stored by the communication
7 system by means of the automatic store function (see Program options General), it
can no longer be loaded from the PC into the communication system in Delta mode.
If you use Delta mode, the changes that you made before you saved will not be
transferred.

See also:
– Section 1.3, “File Types”, on page 1-9
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”
– Section 5.4, “Save Customer Database As”, on page 5-8
– Section 9.1.1, “Program options General”, on page 9-3

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-7
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Save Customer Database As

5.4 Save Customer Database As

File | Save customer database as

The active CDB can be saved under a different file name by using Save customer database
as. You can then specify the name and storage location of the file.

If the customer database was manually stored or was stored by the communication
7 system by means of the automatic store function (see Program options General), it
can no longer be loaded from the PC into the communication system in Delta mode.
If you use Delta mode, the changes that you made before you saved will not be
transferred.

Save
Similarly, the default storage location is the folder that was set using Options | Program op-
tions General. You can optionally change the folder and specify some other storage location.

File name
The name of the CDB. Any customer database that you download from a communication sys-
tem to your PC will be called lastload.kds.

File type
For a description of the various file types, see Section 1.3, “File Types”, on page 1-9.

Notes
This field can be used to enter notes which are then stored with the saved customer database.

Info
This field is used to display the customer name, system type, APS stamp and the date when
the selected customer database was last saved.

See also:
– Section 1.3, “File Types”, on page 1-9
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”
– Section 5.3, “Save Customer Database”, on page 5-7
– Section 9.1.1, “Program options General”, on page 9-3

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-8 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Close Customer Database

5.5 Close Customer Database

File | Close customer database

The Close customer database menu item can be used to close the active customer database.
Please note, however, that it is not necessary to close the current customer database or to exit
the HiPath 3000 Manager before opening a new CDB. When you open a new CDB, the active
CDB is closed automatically. This also applies on exiting the program. If you have made chang-
es to the customer database, you will see a message that allows you to save the changes that
you have made.

See also:
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”
– Section 5.2, “Open Customer Database”, on page 5-5
– Section 5.9, “Exit”, on page 5-50

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-9
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Print / Print Preview

5.6 Print / Print Preview

File | Print
File | Print preview

The menu items Print and Print preview can be activated when the Subscriber dialog is open.
Print can be used to print out station-related data (e.g., flags, assigned class of service groups
and Call Management settings) in a compressed and clear form. In addition, the user can select
if the data should be output to a file (in Excel format *.csv), or to paper. The data printed out is
sorted according to the algorithm selected in the table (ascending, descending, logical).

See also:
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”
– Section 5.7, “Printer Setup”, on page 5-10
– Section 6.2.1, “Subscriber”, on page 6-9

5.7 Printer Setup

File | Printer setup

Printer options can be set up via Print setup. This opens the standard Windows Printer setup
dialog box, in which the settings can be made.

See also:
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”
– Section 5.6, “Print / Print Preview”, on page 5-10

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-10 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8 Transfer

File | Transfer

The Transfer dialog is primarily used to load the configuration of the communication system
into HiPath 3000 Manager and to transfer the modified configuration back to the communication
system. Besides transferring the configuration (CDB), you can also use the Transfer dialog for
Maintenance and Security / User Administration tasks.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Transfer | Communication
– Transfer | Communication | Maintenance
– Transfer | Communication | Security

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-11
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.1 Transfer | Communication

File | Transfer | Communication

The Communication tab allows you to set up various types of transfers between the commu-
nication system and your PC.

The settings in the interfaces must correspond to those in the communication sys-
> tem.
Example:
If you select either the Modem or the ISDN options, you must enter a number
via which the communication system can be accessed before a connection can
be established. For example: 9,14084921234...890.
In this case, because the connection is to be set up by the automatic attendant
and the standard number of the IMOD has not been changed, the connection is
established from a PABX (9,) followed by the local or long-distance number and
then the (...890).

5.8.1.1 Area: Access

Direct
If your PC is connected directly to the communication system, you should select the Direct op-
tion. To use this option, the PC must be connected to the communication system via a null mo-
dem cable.

Modem
If you have a modem connection between the communication system and your PC, select the
Modem option. When this option is selected, the communication system displays a text box
where telephone numbers can be entered.

To ensure proper functioning, the settings under Modem parameters, Modem type,
> and Init string might need to be adjusted (see Program options Communication).

Call number
If you select either the Modem, ISDN or RMM Client options, you must enter a number via
which the communication system can be accessed before a connection can be established.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-12 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

IP-HiPath
This option makes it possible to access the communication system over a LAN via the HG
1500 card or the LAN interface.

IP address
In order to set up a connection, the IP address via which the communication system can be
reached must be specified for the IP-HiPath and IP-IVM options.

Disconnect following action


By default, the connection is automatically terminated after an action has been implemented
(e.g., Read/write database or Maintenance). It is not possible to terminate the connection for
ISDN and modem connections. This allows you to execute several actions sequentially (Read
customer database ->Event Log,...).
The connection must be released manually using the Hang up button, or – if no additional ac-
tions are executed – is automatically ended after an adjustable time. This time can be set under
Program options Communication.

Hang up
Releases/Terminates a modem or ISDN connection.

5.8.1.2 Area: Route

PIN code
The customer can program an individual six-digit PIN code in the system administration (Re-
mote service, Accesses). To set up a connection to a digital modem, this individual code must
be entered in the PIN code field. The default PIN code will not work with a digital modem. This
means that the customer must explicitly allow the access to the modem by entering this PIN
code.
If necessary, the PIN code can be reset to the default value using the password-protected sys-
tem administration function (terminal only, i.e. not HiPath 3000 Manager).
If the station PIN is reset and the customer database is loaded to the system in Delta mode,
the PIN number in the system is not set to 00000. In order to transfer a PIN number to the com-
munication system, delta mode must be deactivated and the Call charges option activated.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-13
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.1.3 Read/write database, System -> PC, PC -> system option


Read/write database can be used to transfer the CDB from the communication system to the
PC (System -> PC) or to load the active CDB from the PC to the communication systems PC
-> system). Depending on the communication system, this procedure takes between two and
six minutes.
Note that a read is always implemented first in order to have an error-free customer database
even if a transmission error should occur.

When the CDB is downloaded from the communication system, it is always assigned
7 the file name lastload.kds. In the process, all changes that were undertaken on the
existing lastload.kds file are overwritten. If the existing file should be retained, it must
be renamed beforehand (e.g., via Save Customer Database As).
The following options are available for applications connected to HiPath 3000/5000 Manager E
via the OLE port:
● Read CDB with IVM. The CDB is load with IVM.
● Read CDB without IVM. The CDB is loaded without IVM.

Load IVM data, System -> PC, PC -> System


If IVM Download is activated (default setting), the IVM data is transferred from the communi-
cation system to the PC using the System -> PC button. If IVM Download is deactivated, only
the CDB is transferred.
If IVM Upload is activated (default setting), the IVM data is transferred from the PC to the com-
munication system using the PC -> System button. If IVM Upload is deactivated, only the CDB
is transferred.

Delta mode
Delta mode can only be activated when a CDB read from the communication system was load-
ed. The option has a gray background when a customer database has been loaded from the
hard disk.
When Delta mode is active, only the changes made since the last Read database are written
into the communication system. If, for example, only a station name is changed, then the trans-
mission time is drastically reduced. In order to determine the delta data, the loaded/active CDB
is compared with the lastload.kds file, which is automatically created and stored on the hard
disk whenever the CDB is read.
Following every successful delta transmission, a log file is created in which the transmitted data
is recorded. A dialog box is displayed to allow you to specify the name of the log file. If no name
is explicitly specified for the log file, a log file named delta.log is generated automatically. The
Log file contains a paragraph in its header in which the compared customer database names

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-14 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

and the creation data are listed. The creation date of the reference customer database is the
date on which the customer database is stored on the hard disk. The creation date of the delta
customer database is the PC time at which the delta transmission was triggered.

If the database was manually stored or was stored by the communication system by
7 means of the automatic store function (see Program options General), it can no long-
er be loaded from the PC into the communication system in Delta mode. If you use
Delta mode, the changes that you made before you saved will not be transferred.
Only the customer database that is currently loaded in the communication system
should be transmitted. An older customer database may not be transmitted into the
communication system in this manner.

Call charges
Activating the Call charges option causes the contents of a particular memory area (RDI =
ReaD or Init) of the communication system to be overwritten by the customer database. This
data contains values that can be only read or initialized.
It makes sense to select this field when exchanging the motherboard so that all data can be
completely taken over or when resetting the following data:
– Call charges
– Counter for the features activated in the communication system
– Station code lock
The following data is also overwritten:
– External call forwarding destinations
– activated call forwarding by station
– Messages sent (message waiting)
– Call forwarding destinations
– Codeword for enabling the mobile telephone
– Cordless base station data

5.8.1.4 Maintenance option


On selecting the Maintenance option, further dialogs to set parameters for remote mainte-
nance of the communication system are displayed (see Section 5.8.2, “Transfer | Communica-
tion | Maintenance”).

5.8.1.5 Security option


The Security option displays the Change password, User administration and Protocol but-
tons.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-15
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

Change password
When you select this option, a Change password in system dialog box is displayed. This di-
alog box allows you to change the current password used in the communication system. The
change is immediately executed.

User administration
When you select this option a dialog Security | User administration is displayed where the user
administrator can define new users and assign them to a user group. Existing users can be de-
leted.

Protocol
When you select this option, the Security | Protocol dialog box is displayed, where the revisor
can control the security data records.

See also:
– Section 1.1.2, “Security (User administration)”, on page 1-5
– Section 4.2.1, “Station view: Flags”, on page 4-5
– Section 5.8, “Transfer”, on page 5-11
– Section 5.8.2, “Transfer | Communication | Maintenance”, on page 5-17
– Section 9.1.1, “Program options General”, on page 9-3
– Section 9.1.3, “Program options Communication”, on page 9-7

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-16 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.2 Transfer | Communication | Maintenance

File | Transfer | Communication | Maintenance

Maintenance is used to change the settings that are needed for remote maintenance of the
communication system. Remote maintenance is possible through direct access (V.24 interface)
or through Callback.
To see the Maintenance dialogs:
1. Select File/Transfer.
2. Switch to the Communication tab.
3. Select the Maintenance option.
4. Click the Maintenance button.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)
– Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations
– Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations: Display Statistical Data
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)
● Maintenance | EVM
– Maintenance | EVM: Initialize mailboxes
– Maintenance | EVM: Execute file operations
● Maintenance | Trace Settings

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-17
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.3 Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)

Read data
Current IVM information is displayed after Read data is pressed.

Hardware version
The hardware version of the IVM sand the associated Siemens code (part) numbers are shown
here. In the case of an IVMP8 or IVMS8, 2 code numbers are displayed; one for the wall hous-
ing (e.g., HiPath 3350, HiPath 3550) and one for the 19" rack housing (e.g., HiPath 3300, Hi-
Path 3500).

Software version
The software version of the IVM and the associated Siemens code (part) number are displayed
here.

Language 1, 2, 3
Descriptions of the languages currently available on the IVM can be found here. The language
and version are displayed.

MAC ID
The MAC ID of the IVM card. This information is needed to set up network access.

Released channels
Maximum number of channels that can be concurrently seized.

Activated features
The features available in the current software are listed here. At present, this includes only the
Automatic attendant functionality.

Res. mailboxes, free


Initial statistical data on the capacity of the IVM can be found here. This includes: how many
mailboxes are currently reserved and how many are still free.

Hard disk load


Here you can see what percentage of the IVM storage capacity has already been utilized. See
Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations: Display Statistical Data for further details.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-18 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

Lock
The lock status of the IVM after the Read data is displayed in the two activation boxes HW lock
active and SW lock active.

Next Buttons
The "Next" buttons branch to the appropriate subdialogs.

Subdialogs
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)
– Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations
– Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations: Display Statistical Data

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-19
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.4 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)


Mailbox configuration can be used to display and partially configure the settings for the indi-
vidual mailboxes.

Tabs
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Message call
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Substitute
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: COS
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Personal week plan
– Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: E-mail notification

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 5.8.5, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General”, on page 5-21
– Section 5.8.6, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Message call”, on page
5-23
– Section 5.8.7, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Substitute”, on page 5-24
– Section 5.8.8, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: COS”, on page 5-25
– Section 5.8.9, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Personal week plan”, on
page 5-26
– Section 5.8.10, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: E-mail notification”, on
page 5-27

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-20 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.5 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General


The general settings of the mailbox are displayed via General. The settings released for the
mailbox by the COS (see also Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: COS) fare automati-
cally displayed.

5.8.5.1 Table Selection


You can select the mailbox whose data is to be displayed/modified here.

5.8.5.2 Area: Status

Mailbox activated
This option shows whether the mailbox has been released. If this is not the case, it can be re-
leased by enabling the option. Please note, however, that it is not possible to deactivate a mail-
box that has already been released.

Message recording activated


This option shows whether message recording has been turned on. The status can be activat-
ed and deactivated.

5.8.5.3 Area: Greetings

active
You can see here - depending on the COS of the mailbox - which of the maximum of 4 greetings
is activated. The active greeting can also be changed. In addition, you can also see for each
greeting whether a "Standard" greeting or "User-defined" greeting is involved.

User name available


This option shows whether a user name is available. The status cannot be changed here.

Private message available


This option shows whether a private message is available. The status cannot be changed here.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-21
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.5.4 Area: Settings


The settings for the following options are displayed here. The settings of these options cannot
be modified here.

Language Set language


Greeting control Selected type of greeting control (manual, day/night HiPath,
calendar or type of call; depending on the COS of the mail-
box, not all options are always available)
Fax intercept Current Fax intercept
Hunt group code Current hunt group code
Route code Current route code (trunk group)
Attendant console Call no. of the attendant console
Name selection permitted The mailbox is entered in the directory for name dialing
Information mailbox The mailbox is configured as an information mailbox, which
allows the caller to navigate within the greeting or to listen
to it repeatedly, for example.
Automatic hook on after an- After the announcement, the mailbox is automatically re-
nouncement leased. This option is only available for information mailbox-
es.

Sorting messages
You can set the sort order for messages in each mailbox separately using the drop-down list
(LiFo or FiFo). If you select LiFo (Last in - First out), the most recent message is announced
first. If you select FiFo (First in - First out), the oldest message is announced first.
Default setting: system-specific.

See also:
– Section 5.8.4, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)”, on
page 5-20
– Section 5.8.6, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Message call”, on page
5-23
– Section 5.8.7, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Substitute”, on page 5-24
– Section 5.8.8, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: COS”, on page 5-25

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-22 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.6 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Message call


Message call can be used to configure the message call (if allowed by the mailbox COS):
● Activate/deactivate message call function generally
● Activate message call, provided the call number is entered there
● Define call numbers and suffixes
● Define general greeting message for urgent calls
● Define notification times at which a message call is to occur

5.8.6.1 Table Selection


You can select the mailbox whose data is to be displayed/modified here.

5.8.6.2 Area: General greeting message

Activated Activate or deactivate the message call function generally


Message call active Activated call number to be notified
Call Number Call numbers to be notified
Suffix dialing Digit sequence sent as DTMF characters after connecting to
the call number to be notified, e.g., in the display of a pager
only urgent calls Message calls should only be made in urgent cases
Weekly program with notifi- currently set user-defined notification times within the frame-
cation times work of a weekly program (Monday to Sunday). If no times
(Monday ... Sunday) have been set, the current time appears in both fields here.
To deactivate a message call for a day, both times must be set
to 00:00.

See also:
– Section 5.8.4, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)”, on
page 5-20
– Section 5.8.5, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General”, on page 5-21
– Section 5.8.7, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Substitute”, on page 5-24
– Section 5.8.8, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: COS”, on page 5-25

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-23
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.7 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Substitute

The "substitute mailbox" and the "Voice mailbox selection on call forwarding" feature
7 is not yet implemented in HiPath 3000!

Substitute can be used to configure the substitute call (if allowed by the mailbox COS):
– Activate/deactivate substitute function generally
– Activate substitute, provided the call number is entered there
– Define call number

5.8.7.1 Table Selection


You can select the mailbox whose data is to be displayed/modified here.

5.8.7.2 Area: Substitute

Activated Activate or deactivate the substitute function generally


Substitute function active Manually activated call numbers to be dialed in place of the
original number.
Substitute function active Active call numbers (the first four numbers) to be dialed in
and place of the original number.
Selection according to call
type active
Call number Enter the call numbers to which a call is to be forwarded when
using the substitute function.

See also:
– Section 5.8.4, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)”, on
page 5-20
– Section 5.8.5, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General”, on page 5-21
– Section 5.8.6, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Message call”, on page
5-23
– Section 5.8.8, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: COS”, on page 5-25

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-24 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.8 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: COS


COS is used to display the COS of a mailbox in detail.

5.8.8.1 Table Selection


You can select the mailbox whose data is to be displayed here.

5.8.8.2 Area: COS


The relevant COS (Class Of Service) is displayed here. The settings of the mailbox cannot be
modified here.

See also
– Section 5.8.4, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)”, on
page 5-20
– Section 5.8.5, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General”, on page 5-21
– Section 5.8.6, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Message call”, on page
5-23
– Section 5.8.7, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Substitute”, on page 5-24

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-25
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.9 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Personal week plan


The Personal week plan can be used if different settings from the general calendar (see Sec-
tion 6.8.8, “IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar”, on page 6-118) are required.
Every AutoAttendant Mailbox receives a personal week plan. This personal week plan has the
same structure as the general calendar (daytime, noon, night-time and special time).

5.8.9.1 Area: Selection


You can select the mailbox whose data is to be displayed/modified here.

5.8.9.2 Personal Week Plan Activated flag


This flag enables or disables the Personal Week Plan feature. The Personal Week Plan can
only be edited if the flag has been activated. After the personal mailbox calendar has been ac-
tivated, the general calendar is no longer used.

5.8.9.3 Area: Week plan


The times for the mailbox can be defined here for each day of the week and recording can be
activated or deactivated.

5.8.9.4 Use Common Special Days (Year) flag


This flag can only be set if the Personal Week Plan Activated flag is enabled.
When allocating/activating a personal week plan, you can select whether (flag disabled) or not
(flag enabled) the personal week plan is also to apply on the defined special days.

See also
– Section 5.8.4, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)”, on
page 5-20
– Section 5.8.5, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General”, on page 5-21
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109
– Section 6.8.8, “IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar”, on page 6-118

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-26 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.10 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: E-mail notification


When new voice mail messages arrive in the mailbox, an email notification is created and sent.
The user can then check the message from a phone and also from a PC via his or her email
mailbox. Furthermore, the presence of the notification in the form of a file also makes it easy to
create an electronic archive of such messages.

5.8.10.1 Call no. and Name table


You can select the mailbox whose data is to be displayed/modified here.

5.8.10.2 Use Template button


This button has no effect on the email addresses.

5.8.10.3 E-mail Notification flag


This flag enables or disables the E-mail Notification feature.

5.8.10.4 Defining email messages


You can enter up to 3 email addresses. For every email address, you can also define whether
the message should be appended as a Wave file.

5.8.10.5 Area: SMTP Server


You can enter either the IP address or the DNS Name of the SMTP server here. The default
setting for the SMTP port is 25.

5.8.10.6 Area: Delete voice mails


You can select between three alternatives here:
Manual: The voice mail is deleted manually.
Automatic - after notification: The voice mail is deleted automatically, e.g., immediately after
the email was sent.
Automatic - after predefined time: The voice mail is deleted after a predefined time period (1-
90 days). Only the voice mails that have already been heard are deleted.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-27
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.10.7 Area: SMTP Authentication


If the SMTP Authentication flag is not activated, then no authentication occurs.
If the SMTP Authentication flag has been activated, you will need to enter your user name and
password and to select the authentication and encryption method.

See also
– Section 5.8.4, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)”, on
page 5-20
– Section 5.8.5, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General”, on page 5-21
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-28 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.11 Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox Configuration: Automatic Call


Forwarding
Automatic call forwarding can be used if the station does not respond to a call within a given
time (this time can be set). The call is then automatically forwarded to the specified call forward-
ing destination.

5.8.11.1 Table Selection


In this area, you can select the mailbox to which the call should be automatically forwarded.

5.8.11.2 Activate Calling Ling Identification Presentation (CLIP)


You can activate automatic call forwarding in this area.

5.8.11.3 Table Allocation

Index column
Index of the incoming call number.

Incoming call number column


You can enter the calling stations here.

Column number
You can enter the switching destination here.

See also
– Section 5.8.4, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)”, on
page 5-20
– Section 5.8.5, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: General”, on page 5-21
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-29
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.12 Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations


Execute file operations can be used to select the desired file operation.

5.8.12.1 Area: Read file

STATISTIC
The IVM’s STATISTIC file contains information about the IVM’s use distribution.
On selecting STATISTIC, the PC file dialog box appears; this is the file on the PC where the
file loaded from the IVM is to be stored.
If the Read: IVM->PC button is then pressed, the size of the STATISTIC file is displayed. This
can be used to reach conclusions concerning the transmission time. After confirmation of the
transmission start, the transmission of the STATISTIC file is carried out.
After the successful transmission, the IVM statistic data are stored under the name previously
entered and the data contained are displayed (see Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations:
Display Statistical Data).
As an alternative, the Load: File->PC button may also be used; then a statistic file that was
saved earlier can be displayed once again (see (Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations:
Display Statistical Data).

BACKUP
The Backup file contains data about mailboxes that should be saved. It is compiled by the IVM
when the HiPath 3000 Manager requests it.
On selecting BACKUP, the PC file dialog box appears (this is the file on the PC where the file
loaded from the IVM is to be stored), and the registered mailboxes are displayed in a list.
The BACKUP-/RESTORE Parameter option can be used to set whether the messages are to
be included in the backup. You can define whether the data of all mailboxes or only these
mailboxes should be saved. If these mailboxes was selected, the appropriate mailboxes can
be marked in the list of all configured mailboxes.
If the Read: IVM->PC button is then pressed, the size of the Backup file is displayed. This can
be used to reach conclusions concerning the transmission time. After confirmation of the trans-
mission start, the transmission of the Backup file is carried out.
After the successful transmission of the IVM backup file, the IVM backup data are stored under
the name previously input.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-30 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.12.2 Area: Write file

RESTORE
The Restore file is an extract from a Backup file and is compiled from such a backup file. If a
Restore file is transferred to the IVM, the IVM accepts the data contained in it automatically.
On selecting RESTORE, the PC file dialog box opens. You can then enter the file on the PC
from where the backed up data is to be restored. After the file name has been entered, the As-
sistant reads the mailbox information that was stored in it. The mailboxes contained are dis-
played in a list. By using the options in the BACKUP-/RESTORE parameter field, the informa-
tion Greetings, Messages or Mailbox configuration that was contained in the backup file is
now presented for selection. The highlight can be removed from data that are not to be a part
of the restore.
The restore process type can be set with the overwrite option. In default mode, overwrite is
not selected. In this case, the selected mailboxes are overwritten with the restore data or rec-
reated. For the selected overwrite option, all mailboxes set up in the IVM are first deleted and
then the selected restore data is written. You can define whether the data of all mailboxes or
these mailboxes should be restored. If these mailboxes was selected, the appropriate mail-
boxes can be marked in the list of all configured mailboxes that are present in the backup file.
After pressing the button Write: PC->IVM, the volume of the data to be transferred is displayed.
This can be used to reach conclusions concerning the transmission time. After confirmation of
the transmission start, the transmission of the Restore data to the IVM is carried out.

5.8.12.3 Greetings, PC->IVM Delta


This option shows the configured mailboxes in a listbox or, if the Greetings option is selected
(versions 2 and 3), in another listbox. The required mailboxes can be selected and modified.
● IVM - Version 1:
Once you have selected a mailbox from the Select mailbox to store greeting listbox, the
greetings are immediately downloaded from the IVM and displayed in the Greetings field.
● IVM - Version 2 and Version 3:
If you select the Greetings option (radio button) the Select mailbox to store greeting list-
box appears next to the Select mailbox to store greeting listbox, where you can select
several mailboxes.
The greetings can be modified in the Greetings field for the selected mailboxes. If no mailbox
is selected in the Select mailbox to store greeting listbox, the greetings in the Greetings field
are transferred to the mailboxes selected in the Select mailbox to store greeting listbox.
When you click Delete, “Standard” is displayed. In other words, the greeting is deleted on the
IVM and the standard greeting is reset.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-31
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

When a greeting is selected, it is automatically converted into the CCITT format in the back-
ground. This may take some time when large files are involved.
After the editing has been completed, only the modified data is transferred to the IVM on click-
ing the PC->IVM Delta button.

5.8.12.4 Data transfer via IP-IVM with FTP


If the conditions for fast FTP access to the IVM are satisfied, the option Data transfer via IP-
IVM with FTP is enabled and can be selected. On selecting this option, the relevant IP address
is displayed.

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 5.8.4, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration (as of IVM Version 2)”, on
page 5-20
– Section 5.8.13, “Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations: Display Statistical Data”,
on page 5-33

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-32 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.13 Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations: Display Statistical


Data
Statistical data is displayed via Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations and the STATIS-
TIC option.
Display Statistical Data displays different types of statistics of the IVM.

General
The General tab shows some general information on the usage level of the IVM.

Sort by
The Sort by ... tabs contains details on 25 mailboxes each, including the call number of the
mailbox, the number of available messages for that mailbox, how many of those messages
have not been processed, the total recording time, the date the mailbox was last accessed by
the user, and the respective dates of the most recent and oldest messages. The tabs are sorted
in various ways (by number of messages, age of message and by total recording time) and may
also include different mailboxes.

Busy times table


The Busy times table tab shows the periods (broken down hourly) within the last 30 days in
which the IVM was not available for the indicated number of minutes because all ports were
busy. This allows conclusions to be drawn about whether the number of ports for a given cus-
tomer should be increased to achieve an acceptable level of availability.

See also:
– Section 5.8.12, “Maintenance | IVM: Execute file operations”, on page 5-30
– Section 5.8.15, “Maintenance | EVM: Initialize mailboxes”, on page 5-36

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-33
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.14 Maintenance | EVM

During the execution of Maintenance | EVM, the EVM is no longer accessible to the
7 user.

Read data
Current EVM information is displayed on clicking Read data.

Hardware version
The Siemens part numbers of the EVM are shown here.

Firmware version
The Firmware version of the EVM is shown here.

Languages
The languages loaded into the EVM are shown here. The following naming conventions exist:
xxxxAABB
where:
xxxx= four-digit version number
AA = two-digit language code
BB = two-digit country code
The country code (BB) is usually identical to the language code (AA).

Language Code Country Code Language


de de German
en uk English (UK)
es es Spanish
fr fr French
it it Italian
nl nl Dutch
pt pt Portuguese
ro ro Romanian

Production information
The Production Information for the EVM board is shown here.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-34 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

Memory usage
Here you can see what percentage of the EVM storage capacity has already been used.

Initialize mailboxes
This button takes you to the corresponding Maintenance | EVM: Initialize mailboxes subdialog.

Delete all Mess./Greetings


On clicking the Delete all Mess./Greetings button, all messages and greetings on the EVM
are deleted.

Execute file operations


This button takes you to the corresponding Maintenance | EVM: Execute file operations subdi-
alog.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-35
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.15 Maintenance | EVM: Initialize mailboxes


The configured mailboxes are shown in the Mailboxes list and can be transferred to the Ini-
tialize mailboxes list by using the "drag&drop" technique.

Initialize mailboxes
On clicking the Initialize mailboxes button, the following actions are performed for the mail-
boxes in the Initialize mailboxes list:
Standard Mailboxes:
– The password is reset
– The Recording flag is set
– Messages are deleted
– Greetings are deleted
– Greeting control to manual
– Active greeting: Greeting 1
AutoAttendant Mailboxes:
– The password is reset
– The "Intercept after announcem." and "no suffix-dialing" flags are disabled.
– Speed destinations are deleted
– Greetings are deleted
– Greeting control to manual
– Active greeting: Greeting 1

See also
– Section 5.8.14, “Maintenance | EVM”, on page 5-34
– Section 5.8.16, “Maintenance | EVM: Execute file operations”, on page 5-37

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-36 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.16 Maintenance | EVM: Execute file operations


Execute file operations can be used to select the desired file operation.

5.8.16.1 Area: Greetings


The configured mailboxes are shown in the drop-down list. The desired mailbox can be select-
ed. The greetings in the selected mailbox are loaded on the PC for Greeting 1 (day) and Greet-
ing 2 (night), respectively, and displayed. If the name Standard is displayed here, this means
that no customized greeting is available for the subscriber.

Save
On clicking Save, the greeting is saved under the specified path and file name.

The greetings are saved in binary format on the PC and can therefore not be played
> back or modified.

Load
A previously saved greeting or a Wave file can be selected by clicking Load. The Wave file to
be loaded must have the following format:
PCM, 16 Bit, 8kHz, mono
The selected Wave file is converted on loading. Depending on the size of the Wave file, this
may take some time. You can select the audio quality via the CODEC setting subdialog. The
available options are: memory-optimized or HiQuality.
After the loading has been completed, the modified data is transferred to the EVM on clicking
the Write: PC->EVM button.

Clear/Undo
The selected greeting can be deleted. After clicking Clear (but before the transfer to the EVM!),
the selection can be optionally undone by then clicking Undo.
After the editing has been completed, the modified data is transferred to the EVM on clicking
the Write: PC->EVM button.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-37
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

Languages file
The language file to be loaded can be selected via Languages file. After a valid language file
has been selected, the version and language are displayed (see Maintenance | EVM for naming
conventions).
On clicking Write: PC-> EVM, the selected file is transferred to the EVM.

Firmware
The Firmware to be loaded can be selected via Firmware. After a valid Firmware file has been
selected, the version is displayed.

Deleting a Language File


The language files loaded on the EVM are displayed in the list. (see Maintenance | EVM for
naming conventions). After a language file has been selected, the selected file can be removed
from the EVM by clicking the Delete Language File button.

See also:
– Section 5.8.14, “Maintenance | EVM”, on page 5-34
– Section 5.8.15, “Maintenance | EVM: Initialize mailboxes”, on page 5-36

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-38 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.17 Maintenance | Trace Settings

Trace profiles
The trace profiles are feature-oriented with specific traces are assigned to them. This allows
users with limited experience to activate the required traces in accordance with the faulty fea-
ture. Up to three trace profiles can be activated. This is an advantage where a fault occurs in
several features.

Procedure
1. Click on Set Default to enable the trace profile.
2. Based on the fault that occurs in the "Trace Profiling" -> "Step 1: Feature Selection" list,
determine the required trace profiles. See also "Trace profiles with assigned traces".
3. Select the trace profiles and click on Add Profile to add the trace profile from the list below.
4. Under "Step 2: Combined Problem": Link the selected feature to a superordinate problem
from the five options shown and then activate the option that most closely corresponds.
The first option is activated by default and can be selected if no other option corresponds.
5. Activate traces from the "Trace-Process" menu list, if applicable.
6. Click on Write Data to transfer the trace settings from the profiles added above and from
the activated option to the communication system.
7. Click on Trace Start to start the traces.

NOTE: If there are too many active traces, this will reduce the performance of the communi-
cation system. For this reason, the following must be observed for the traces in the "Trace-
Process" list:
● The traces may only be activated by very experienced users, where requested by the de-
velopment department or where prompted by a help text.
● The traces may only be activated after traces have already been activated via the "Trace
Profiling" list.
● The traces may only be activated in addition to the traces selected via the "Trace Profiling"
list.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-39
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

Trace profiles with assigned traces


The following table shows the trace profiles available in the "Trace Profiling" -> "Step 1: Feature
Selection" list and the traces assigned to them:

Trace profile Assigned traces


Automatic Call Distribution (UCD Groups) ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port-User
● CP-Net
Actuators / Sensors / Door Opener ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port-User
● AkSe
● Obus
● DH-SLA
Call Forwarding - Call Dest. List ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port-User
● CP-Net
Call Pickup Group (standalone environment) ● CP-Port-User
Call Pickup Group (network environment) ● CP-API
DSS Keys ● CP-API
BMO (Central Busy Signaling) ● CP-Port-Service Handler
CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction) ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port-User
Caller List (missed calls) ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port-User
Code Lock - DND (do not disturb) - Room ● CP-Port-Service Handler
monitor ● CP-Port-User
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port API
● API-CTI
Group Call (Hunt groups, Groups, Call Waiting ● CP-Net
group)
Path replacement ● CP-Net
Handsfree Answer ● CP-Port-Service Handler
Message Waiting ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port-User
Tabelle 5-2 Trace profiles with assigned traces

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-40 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

Trace profile Assigned traces


Night Service ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port-User
Automatic Callback ● CP-Port-Service Handler
● CP-Port-User
● CP-Port-Sub
Ringing Group ● CP-Net
● CP-Port-Service Handler
Camp-on ● none
Silent Call Waiting ● CP-Port-Service Handler
Call Transfer ● CP-Net
● CP-Port-User
MULAP / Mobile Connect ● CP-Net
Conference / Call Intrusion / Silent monitoring ● CP-Net
/ Discreet Call (whisper) ● DH-NW
● CP-Resource Manager Interface
Call Duration ● DH-UPN
● CP-Port-Accounting
● Display
OCA (optiClient Attendant) ● DH-UPN
● CP-Port-Sub
● DH-CORNET-TS
CDR (Call Charges) ● DH-UPN
● CP-Port-Accounting
● CP_CCO: GEZ
● CP-CCO
EVM ● DH-UPN
● DH-EVM
● VMM
IVM ● DH-UPN
CLIP on analog phones ● DH-SLA
● Input-Output process
CMI ● DH-UPN
● DH-CMI
Assistant-T ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Tabelle 5-2 Trace profiles with assigned traces

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-41
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

Trace profile Assigned traces


Associated services - Flex Call ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Common Hold ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
DISA ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
DTMF ● CP-Port-User
Hotline ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Key Programming ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
LDAP - Phonebook ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Meet me ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
MSN ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Mute ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Override ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Park Call ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
PKZ (Account codes) ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Redial ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
IP Mobility ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Speaker call ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Speed Dialing System ● CP-Port-User
● DH-UPN
Tabelle 5-2 Trace profiles with assigned traces

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-42 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

Trace profile Assigned traces


LCR ● CP-Port-User
● CP-Net
● CP-Port-Sub
Plug in/out devices and accessories ● DH-UPN
● DH-CORNET-TS
Led signaling ● DH-UPN
TLANI/TLA/TMANI port/card blocking ● DH-HKZ
● Input-Output Process
SLA/SLMA/SLMAE port/card blocking ● DH-SLA
● Input-Output Process
E&M Tie trunks ● DH-E&M
● Input-Output Process
Calls via analog trunks ● DH-HKZ
● Input-Output Process
Calls to/from analog subscribers ● DH-SLA
● Input-Output Process
Call lost - Destination not reachable ● CP-Port-User
Card module startup problem ● Presence
● Input-Output process
Attenuation problems ● NW traces
IMODN function ● Presence
● IMOD
Resources problems: (MOH, Conferences, ● DH-RM
DSPs, Paging, Announcements) ● CP-Resource Manager Interface
● DH-NW
LIM ● Ethernet Driver
ANI Module ● Obus
● DH-HKZ
T1 Analog (Loopstart/Groundstart) ● DH-HKZ
T1 Digital ● none
Licencing ● Database
Tabelle 5-2 Trace profiles with assigned traces

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-43
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

Options
The options in the "Step 2: Combined Problem" list activate additional trace settings. Informa-
tion is provided via help texts as to which traces apart from system software traces should be
additionally activated. The options to be additionally activated are:

Option Assigned traces


General problem category
General Display issue ● DH-UPN
Speechpath problem (if no IP telephones/ ● CP-Resource Manager Interface
trunks are integrated)
Speechpath problem ● DH-UPN
● DH-NW
Wrong display at OpenStage 40/60/80 ● CP-Port-Sub
● DH-UPN
● DH-CORNET-TS
Tabelle 5-3 Options from the "Step 2: Combined Problem" list

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-44 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

5.8.18 Transfer | Communication | Security

File | Transfer | Communication | Security

Security is used to manage the security parameters in the system.


To view the Security dialogs:
1. Select File/Transfer.
2. Switch to the Communication tab.
3. Select the Security option.
4. Select one of the buttons on the right of the Security option.

Tabs and Dialogs


● Security | User administration

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-45
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.19 Security | User administration

File | Transfer | Communication | Security | User administration

The User administration function can be used to define new users and to assign them to a
user group.
For more information on user administration, see also Section 1.1.2, “Security (User adminis-
tration)”, on page 1-5.
New users are registered by entering a user name in the table and assigning a user group.
Then a password is assigned to the newly set-up user by double-clicking on the Password col-
umn; this password must be changed when logging on to the communication system for the
first time.
Users who are already registered can be deleted by deleting the corresponding user name and
resetting the user group to none.

5.8.19.1 User administration table

User name column


This column is used to enter the user name, which may be up to 15 characters. The following
characters are permitted:
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890 #*+-.,//)/

User group column


User access rights can be determined by specifying one of the 6 user groups available (see
Section 1.1.2, “Security (User administration)”, on page 1-5).

Password column
By double-clicking on a field of this column the Create password dialog box is opened for the
selected user. A default password can only be created for new users. Passwords cannot be
modified here. In any case, this can only be implemented by the users themselves.

If a user forgets their password, they must be deleted from the system by another
7 authorized user and reconfigured.
If the last authorized user also forgets their password, the communication system
has to be regenerated.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-46 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

Created column
In this column the creation date of the user is displayed.

Last used column


This column indicates when the selected user last logged into the communication system.

5.8.19.2 Buttons

Group chip card


<currently without any function>

Indiv. chip card


<currently without any function>

See also:
– Section 1.1.2, “Security (User administration)”, on page 1-5
– Section 5.8.1, “Transfer | Communication”, on page 5-12

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-47
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Transfer

5.8.20 Security | Protocol

File | Transfer | Communication | Security | Protocol

Protocol can be used to display the archiving information from the communication system.
A distinction is made here between:
– Offline mode
– Online mode, Active logging
– Online mode, Logging not active
For more information on the Security protocol, see Section 1.1.2, “Security (User administra-
tion)”, on page 1-5.

5.8.20.1 Buttons

Archive (online mode)


Pressing this button activates the transfer of available data records from the communication
system. After the transfer has completed successfully, the Display and Print buttons appear.
These buttons can then be used to display or print the logs that were last requested. After ar-
chiving, the logs are automatically deleted from the communication system.

Read only (online mode)


This button can be used to call up logs from the communication system without deleting them
or adding them to an archive file.

Display
The selected archive file is converted to text and an external editor is launched. The external
editor can be configured in the ass_150e.ini file. The columns in the text file are separated by
tabs.

Print
Pressing this button opens a dialog box where a range of data records can be selected. The
default printer is used for printing.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-48 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
file.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch File Menu
Transfer

Exit
If online mode (yes) was selected, but logging is not active in the communication system after
connection setup, the dialog can only be exited via the Exit button. The logging mode (active/
inactive) depends on your HW configuration.

See also:
– Section 1.1.2, “Security (User administration)”, on page 1-5
– Section 5.8.1, “Transfer | Communication”, on page 5-12

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 5-49
file.fm

File Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Exit

5.9 Exit

File | Exit

Exits the HiPath 3000 Manager. The active CDB is closed. If changes were made to the cus-
tomer database since the last "Save", you will be asked whether you want to save the CDB.

See also:
– Chapter 5, “File Menu”
– Section 5.3, “Save Customer Database”, on page 5-7
– Section 5.4, “Save Customer Database As”, on page 5-8
– Section 5.5, “Close Customer Database”, on page 5-9

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
5-50 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings01.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu

6 Settings Menu

Settings | Netwide Data


Settings | Set up station
Settings | Least Cost Routing
Settings | Incoming calls
Settings | Classes of service
Settings | System Parameters
Settings | Auxiliary equipment
Table 6-1 Settings Menu

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-1
settings01.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Netwide Data

6.1 Settings | Netwide Data

Settings | Netwide Data

You can use Settings | Netwide Data to define specific parameters for all stations in a net-
worked system. The data which can be modified here for the individual communication systems
must be consistent in the network.

Tabs
● Stations - Netwide Data

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings01.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Netwide Data

6.1.1 Stations - Netwide Data

Settings | Netwide Data | Stations

The Stations tab consists of a table, which is divided into the columns described below. Values
for call numbers, DID numbers, and names can be altered by selecting individual fields.

You can also configure the stations via the new Station view.
>
Node call number
If open numbering is set, the call number of the node is displayed here. A station is reached
from an external telephone by dialing this node number, followed by the call number or the DID
number.
As of HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0, the node number is no longer placed before the DID automati-
cally, regardless of whether the recipient is a local CO or tie trunk. The node number must
therefore be entered as the PABX number .

6.1.1.1 User-defined columns


The first three columns can be defined by the user. The system offers standard settings for the
first two fields, but they can also be overwritten.
Call no. (Call number) column
The Call no. column contains the internal call number of the relevant station. This number may
contain a maximum of six digits.

DID (direct inward dialing number) column


The DID number assigned to the corresponding extension is entered in this column. This num-
ber may contain a maximum of 11 digits. This is the call number used for DID and CorNet.

If a call number if modified in this table, the same modifications must be made in Call
> Management (Settings | Incoming calls).
The tables under Settings | Incoming calls are updated immediately once changes
have been saved for the Call no. and DID fields.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-3
settings01.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Netwide Data

Name column
The name assigned to the station is entered here. The name can be a person’s name, the name
of a department or any other suitable entry. The name can contain a maximum of 16 characters.
The program does not check the characters entered. It is therefore the user or service techni-
cian’s responsibility to ensure that only signs permitted are used.
The following ISO 8859-1 characters can be entered:
– Character 32 through 127 (the usual West-European characters, digits, letters)
– German Umlauts (Ä, Ö, Ü, ä, ö, ü)
– the characters Å, Æ, Ñ, Ø, Õ, õ.
Characters that are not permitted will be replaced with a space in the display.
When setting language conversion “Greek” or “Cyrillic”, the letters of the Greek or Cyrillic al-
phabet can be entered in capital letters.

6.1.1.2 System-specific columns


The system-specific data contained in the previous columns may only be modified by actually
reconfiguring the communication system.

Type column (fourth column)


Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
You can specify here whether the call number relates to a station port or group port.

Inactive column
Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
The status of the relevant station port is displayed in the inactive column. If the * symbol ap-
pears in this column, the port (station) is inactive. If the field is empty, the port is active.

The status indicated here is that of the port when the customer database is down-
> loaded.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings01.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Netwide Data

Type column (sixth column)


Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
The type of telephone connected to the station port is automatically specified by the communi-
cation system. If a telephone is not connected, No Port is displayed in the column. If an analog
telephone is connected, the entry "P.O.T." appears in the column.
– No Port, i.e. no telephone connected
– P.O.T., i.e. analog telephone connected
– System telephone connected
– S0 station

Access column
Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
The name, number and slot of the station system card is displayed here. This column also in-
dicates whether the port is a master or a slave.

This column is often not fully visible. In order to see all entries, use the horizontal
> scroll function or reduce the width of the other columns by moving the column sep-
arators.

System column
Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
This column indicates the network node where the station is located.

6.1.1.3 Network name field


The network name designates the name of the networked system. The configuration is saved
under the network name with the suffix *.net. The network name has no significance for the op-
eration of the networked system, but is only used for transparency.

6.1.1.4 Buttons

LCR Support
LCR Support is intended only for Customer Service.
Requirements for LCR Support:
– HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe
– MS Excel (any version as of Excel 97) must be installed on the PC

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-5
settings01.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Netwide Data

LCR Support can be used to generate dial plan proposals in an Excel table for each individual
node of the network with respect to the availability of the stations at the remaining nodes in the
network. An Excel file is created in the process with as many tables as the nodes on the net-
work. The names of the tables (= titles of the tabs visible in Excel at the bottom left of the
screen) are identified by the names of the CDBs of the nodes.
The rest of the structure in the table depends on the type of numbering for nodes on the net-
work. A distinction can be made here between closed and open numbering.

Closed numbering Every table consists of 3 columns (Excel columns A, B and C).
The first column (A) lists all internal call numbers of the processed
node (detectable from the table name), sorted in ascending order.
The second column (B) lists all internal call numbers of the remain-
ing nodes, sorted in ascending order.
The third column (C) lists the resulting proposals for the dial plan of
the node, also sorted in ascending order. Note that only "-" and "x"
are used here, since the dial plan proposals need to be transparent
and easy to understand. If required, the full internal call numbers are
listed.
Open numbering In this case, the tables consist of only one column (A) in which the
node call numbers of the remaining nodes are listed with a leading
"-" and a closing "z".
The generated proposal must be saved as an Excel file. A Save As dialog box appears after
the generation for this purpose. This dialog box defaults to directory of the HiPath 3000 Man-
ager and the name of the network. The file type filter is preset to .xls and can only be changed
to All Files (*.*). If an existing file is to be overwritten, an appropriate dialog box with a prompt
to this effect is displayed by Excel (which runs in the background).

The default option enabled in this dialog box is No, which means that the generated
7 Excel file will NOT be saved, and the older information in the Excel file named
<network_name>.xls is retained. This also applies if the operation is aborted using
Cancel.
The file generated by Excel using this method can then be opened, and the dial plan proposals
can be transferred to the respective CDBs.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-6 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings01.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Netwide Data

Check
Ensure that you have not assigned the same station number or DID number to two or more sta-
tions by pressing the Check button to initiate a check. If duplicates are found, an error message
is displayed together with a list of the duplicates. You can then make appropriate corrections.
When assigning call numbers in the communication system to S0 stations, the closing digits of
this number must be unique in relation to all internal call numbers of all other stations (for ex-
ample: The S0 call number 9553193 conflicts with the station call number 193.).

See also:
– Section 6.1, “Settings | Netwide Data”, on page 6-2
– Section 6.2.1, “Subscriber”, on page 6-9
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-7
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

6Settings Menu

6.2 Settings | Set up station

Settings | Setup station

Settings | Setup station can be used to view and optionally define or edit the settings for sta-
tions, fax/modem, emergency operation for Workpoint clients and the key programming in the
communication system.

You can also configure the stations via the new Station view.
>
Tabs and Dialog boxes
● Subscriber
● Key programming
– Key programming: Fill/Delete
– Key programming: Print
● Emergency

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-8 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

6.2.1 Subscriber

Settings | Setup station | Stations

The Station tab consists of a table, which is divided into the following columns. The values for
the call number, DID number and name can be changed by selecting the individual fields.
The table is often not fully visible. In order to see all entries, use the horizontal scroll function
or reduce the width of the columns by moving the column separators.
This station status can also be printed via Print / Print Preview.

You can also configure the stations via the new Station view.
>
Call no. (call number) column
The Call no. column contains the internal call number of the relevant station. This number may
contain a maximum of six digits.
When a fax or modem station is deleted (i.e., the call number and DID are deleted), the exten-
sion type must also be be reset to the default (standard).

DID (direct inward dialing number) column


The DID number assigned to the corresponding extension is entered in this column. This num-
ber may contain a maximum of 11 digits. This is the call number used for DID and CorNet.
When a fax or modem station is deleted (i.e., the call number and DID are deleted), the exten-
sion type must also be be reset to the default (standard).

If a call number if modified in this table, the same modifications must be made in Call
> Management (Settings | Incoming calls).
The tables under Settings | Incoming calls are updated immediately once changes
have been saved for the Call no. and DID fields.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-9
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

If your provider has assigned you various MSNs, you can enter these "CO numbers"
> in the DID column to define the call allocation. The MSN is entered without the "pre-
fix". An MSN can only be assigned to a single internal call number. If an MSN is to
be signaled at multiple internal stations, a group or hunt group call number must be
entered. The stations are then assigned to the groups (see Groups/hunt groups).
If you want to unassign the MSN, you can also delete it from the DID column. Please
note, however, that a call to an unassigned MSN (CO numbers) will not be signaled
or only signaled at the first port at the intercept position.

Name column
The name assigned to the station is entered here. The name can also be entered via the Station
view. More details on the name of a station can be found in the station view under Name.

Status column
Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
The status of the relevant station port is displayed in the Status column. If a gray symbol or the
* symbol appears in this column, the port (station) is inactive. If a green symbol appears in this
column or if the field is empty, the port (station) is inactive.
Cordless base stations with SLUC cards are always shown as inactive, since this call number
cannot be reached.
If a mobile phone is involved, the following status indicators are used:

Port active PP registered Status display Meaning


no yes green OK
yes yes red Board lockswitch set for registered PP.
no no yellow PP was automatically logged off by a
change to the PIN in the Manager E.
yes no gray No PP was ever registered on this port.

The status indicated here is that of the port when the customer database is down-
> loaded.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-10 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

Type column
Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
The type of telephone connected to the station port is automatically specified by the communi-
cation system. If a telephone is not connected, No Port is displayed in the column. If an analog
telephone is connected, the column entry is “No Fe”.
– No Port, i.e. no telephone connected
– No Fe, i.e. analog telephone connected
– System telephone connected
– S0 station

Access column
Can only be changed by physically reconfiguring the communication system.
The name, number, slot of the station system board and the type of Workpoint Client
(SYS=System, S0) are displayed here. This column also indicates whether the port is a master
or a slave.
For an offline-configured database, there are no slave ports with HiPath 37xx. You can assign
a slave port to a specific master port by double-clicking the Access field. The result is identical
to connecting a slave terminal on the hardware side and then reading the CDB. If a slave port
is assigned, you can remove it for both the master port and the slave port by double-clicking
the Access field.

CLIP column
If Configurable CLIP is activated, a valid DID number can be specified for each device here .
CLIP and LIN (Location Identification Number; only in the USA) are mutually exclusive. By de-
fault, LIN is activated for the USA and CLIP for all other countries. If CLIP is activated for the
USA, LIN is automatically disabled.

LIN column (Location Identification Number; USA only)


When emergency number E911 is set up, a valid DID (direct inward dialing) is entered for each
telephone. This number identifies the location of the station from which the emergency call was
made. There is no consistency test carried out for this.
LIN and CLIP are mutually exclusive (see also CLIP).

Check button
Ensure that you have not assigned the same station number or DID number to two or more sta-
tions by pressing the Check button to initiate a check. If duplicates are found, an error message
is displayed together with a list of the duplicates. You can then make appropriate corrections.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-11
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

When assigning call numbers in the communication system to S0 stations, the closing digits of
this number must be unique in relation to all internal call numbers of all other stations (for ex-
ample: The S0 call number 9553193 conflicts with the station call number 193).

See also
– Chapter 4, “Station view”
– Section 5.6, “Print / Print Preview”, on page 5-10
– Section 6.2.2, “Key programming”, on page 6-13
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-12 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

6.2.2 Key programming

Settings | Setup station | Key programming

In the Key programming tab , the telephones’ keys can be reserved. Depending on the station
that was selected, the connected telephone is displayed. Furthermore, key modules can be in-
serted and programmed as well as removed. As of Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 2.0, it is possible
to distinguish between a key extension unit and a busy lamp field.
If you click on one of the programmable keys, its assignment is displayed in the Current as-
signment field. This assignment can be changed and stored by selecting a feature in the field
Key code.

These functions are selected using the options in the upper right-hand corner of the mask.
– Key programming option
– Label option (key labeling)
– Type option (configuring the appropriate system telephone)
A list box containing numbers and names is provided below these functions. The station to be
edited can be selected here. The number and name are highlighted in color in the list box, and
also appear on the system telephone display (if it has one).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-13
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

If you select a key under Key programming, the key name is highlighted in color and the cur-
rent assignment is displayed in the Current assignment field. The programmable functions
are displayed in a list box (Key code). When you select one of the features, it appears in the
selection box. To add the feature to the key, click on the symbol with the red check mark.
You can copy the key assignment of the current station to another station via the context menu.

Level 2
The second level of keys is displayed. This applies to key programming, as well as labeling. If
the Type option is selected, this field has no significance. In order to use the second level, a
Shift key must be available. Only external call numbers can be programmed on the second lev-
el. The LEDs always belong to Level 1. The second level is also available for the key exten-
sions, but not on busy lamp fields.

Note that on phones of type optiPoint 500 Advanced, the keys on level 2 are not la-
> beled due to space constraints.

List box
The station to be edited can be selected here. The number and name are highlighted in color
in the list box, and also appear on the system telephone display (if it has one).

Special features of optiPoint 500 entry

Display-related key programming (e.g. call parking, call hold, conference) is no long-
7 er allowed for optiPoint 500 phones.

When reprogramming the default keys, keep in mind that some of these keys cannot be reset
to the default values after the change!
The list of the programmable keys includes the following options:
● Repertory dialing
● Speed dialing
● Speaker call
Depending on the telephone type and/or configuration, not all keys may appear in the selection
box.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-14 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

The following keys cannot be programmed on entry and basic:


● Advisory message
● Ringer cutoff
● Handsfree answer back
● Waiting tone on & off
● Call waiting answer (until SMR_G Rel 2.2)
● Toggle/Connect (until SMR_G Rel 2.2)
● Conference (until SMR_G Rel 2.2)
● Park (until SMR_G Rel 2.2)
● View call
● DTMF dial
● Room monitor
● Release CO trunk
● View call charges
● Calls in queue
● Delete
● Loudspeaker (blocked for entry only)
For reasons of standardization, please ensure that you do not assign alternative or additional
features to the four function keys next to or above the number pad for the terminal types "ad-
vance plus", "standard" and "memory". Tests must be performed in exceptional situations to en-
sure that the system is working properly. It must also be ensured that any changes made do
not result in unwanted errors.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-15
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

Special features with OpenStage 15 and OpenStage 30


When a new OpenStage 15/30 is connected to the communications system, the programmable
function keys are by default assigned with the functions with the displayed in the image:

OpenStage 15 OpenStage 30
Internal Internal

Mute

Number Redial

Disconnect

● Assignment of the first programmable function key with the function "Internal":
– If the "Simplified dialing" feature is activated, then the "Internal" function is automati-
cally assigned to the first programmable function key.
– The "Internal" function can be assigned to another programmable function key.
– If the "Simplified dialing" feature is deactivated having been previously activated, the
"Internal" function is removed from the first programmable function key. If however the
"Internal" function is assigned to another programmable function key, it is not removed.
– If the "Simplified dialing" feature is reactivated, then the "Internal" function is automat-
ically assigned to the first programmable function key, even if this function key is oc-
cupied with another function.
– If the "Simplified dialing" feature is not activated, then the "Internal" function is also not
available.
● The assignment of the programmable function keys is maintained if a reset is executed on
HiPath 3000 or OpenStage 15/30 is disconnected and reconnected. If the operating sys-
tem is reloaded, the assignment of the programmable funtion keys is lost.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-16 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

● Swapping out terminals:


– If OpenStage 15/30 is replaced by another terminal (e.g. by another OpenStage), then
the programmable function keys of this terminal are occupied by default with the func-
tions intended for the terminal.
– If a terminal is replaced by OpenStage 15/30, then the functions keys are occupied by
default with the functions displayed in the above figure.
● If HiPath 3000 is upgraded from an older to a newer system software, then the OpenStage
15/30 connected before the upgrade maintain the same function key assignment as before
the upgrade.

Special features with OpenStage 60 and OpenStage 80


A programmable sensor key on the telephone can be programmed using the HiPath 3000 re-
dial function ("Expanded Redial"). If the redial function is activated by pressing the sensor key,
one of the last 10 external call numbers dialed can be selected.
The HiPath 3000 redial function does not affect the internal list of call numbers dialed that is
stored in the telephone. The redial function of the telephone is available via this list. The last
10 external call numbers dialed are also stored here.

6.2.2.1 Key programming option


All system telephones come with default key programming. However, all of these keys can be
reprogrammed. On display models, some keys can be programmed by the user as well.
When key programming is activated, the telephone connected is displayed in the graphics on
the left side of the dialog for each selected station whose call number is activated in the list box.
It is possible to copy the key programming of a terminal to other stations via the context menu.
The context menu also provides deletion and filling options.
If you click on one of the programmable keys, this key is highlighted in color and its assignment
is displayed in the Current assignment field. This assignment can be changed by selecting a
feature in the Key code field. You can then add the selected feature to the key by clicking the
checkmark icon.

Current assignment
When a key on the telephone’s graphic display is selected/clicked, the current assignment of
the key is displayed.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-17
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

You can copy the key assignment of the current station to another station via the
> context menu. You can use Copy to copy the currently selected key or Copy all to
copy all keys of this terminal. You can then use Paste to copy over the keys that you
copied earlier to the currently selected station. Multiple stations may be selected (us-
ing the Shift or Ctrl key).

Key code
To program a key, the new function is selected under Key code. Depending on the feature, nec-
essary additional information is queried in the additional fields. The user prompts are the same
in this case as for the key programming on the telephone.

6.2.2.2 Label option


Another feature available on the Key programming tab is printing key lables. If you have a
printer attached to the PC used to manage the communication system, you can print out a face-
plate for the system telephone that lists the functions you have programmed for the individual
keys. This faceplate fits under the protective plastic overlay that sits on top of the keys. There
are different faceplate styles to fit the various system telephones.
To print a faceplate for your terminals, select the Label option. The Key code field is replaced
by the Key text field, and the Print and Font buttons are displayed. Print opens a dialog box
in which you can specify the Label print type (Key programming: Print) or select the stations
to be printed.
If you click on one of the programmable keys, this key is highlighted in color and its assignment
is displayed in the Current assignment field. The text for this key is displayed in the Key text
field and can be modified by overwriting the text.

This feature is useful for DSS keys. The name assigned to the station can be printed
> and placed next to the key.

Key text
When selecting the Label option, the Key code field is replaced by the Key text field, and the
Print and Font buttons are displayed. If you click on one of the programmable keys, this key
is highlighted in color and its assignment is displayed in the Current assignment field. The text
for this key is displayed in the Key text field and can be modified by overwriting the text.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-18 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

6.2.2.3 Type option


In this connection, a future telephone type can be predefined for station ports that aren’t insert-
ed. Because of this, keys can be predefined on telephones without the telephone being phys-
ically inserted in the communication system. If the telephone type entered is inserted into the
communication system later and if it matches the programmed type, then the keys are activated
with the predefined function.
If a different type of telephone is physically inserted, the new telephone is put into service with
the standard assignments.
The Terminal type list box appears when selection this option. This list box is used to deter-
mine the terminal type which should be assigned to the station. A corresponding graphic dis-
play of each of the system telephones is stored in the communication system.

If a terminal is already connected to the station port, the communication system au-
> tomatically displays the appropriate graphic display.

Terminal type
On selecting the Type option, the Terminal type list box appears. This list box is used to de-
termine the terminal type which should be assigned to the station.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-19
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

6.2.2.4 Icon buttons

Range Description
Clicking the icon switches the display between the terminal and the key extension
unit/key module or the busy lamp field (only possible if a key extension unit is at-
tached).
When you click the icon, one or more key extension units/key modules of a sys-
tem telephone or a busy lamp field are plugged in (if supported by the device). If
you already have four units, this button will be grayed out.
As of Hicom 150 E Office Pro/Com Rel. 2.0, you will be prompted to specify
whether you want a key extension unit or a busy lamp field.
When you click the icon, one or more key extension units/key modules or busy
lamp fields are deleted. This always deletes the last key extension unit. If there
are no units available, this button will be grayed out.
As of Hicom 150 E Office Pro/Com Rel. 2.0, you will be prompted to verify wheth-
er a key extension unit or busy lamp field is involved.
When you click on the icon, the current key assignment is saved.

See also
– Chapter 4, “Station view”
– Section 6.2.1, “Subscriber”, on page 6-9
– Section 6.2.3, “Key programming: Fill/Delete”, on page 6-21
– Section 6.2.4, “Key programming: Print”, on page 6-23

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-20 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

6.2.3 Key programming: Fill/Delete

Settings | Setup station | Key programming


BLF | Fill/Delete

Fill/Delete BLF keys enables you to quickly set up or delete a busy lamp field. The choices for
filling out the field are ordered by call number (ascending order); only existing call numbers can
be filled in.
To call up the dialog, click on the first icon button on the Key programming tab and select the
menu item Fill/Delete from the context menu (a busy lamp field should have already been set
up in advance via Key programming using the second icon button)

Fill direction
You can select either vertically or horizontally. The starting key is the one selected on calling
the context menu. The direction last used is offered again at the next call.

Action
Fill (default value) or Delete can be selected.
When filling, the start call number and end call number or start call number and number
must be entered.
When deleting, only the number must be entered.

Start call number


Drop-down list with all call numbers. The call number to be placed on the first key (= selected
key) should be specified.

End call number


Drop-down list with all call numbers. The last call number to be displayed should be specified.
The Number field is automatically adjusted when the end call number is entered. The end call
number must not be smaller than the starting call number.

Number
Drop-down with the number of possible keys. The number depends on the position of the se-
lected key. The field “End call number” is automatically adjusted whenever the number is en-
tered.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-21
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

See also
– Section 6.2.2, “Key programming”, on page 6-13

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-22 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

6.2.4 Key programming: Print

Settings | Setup station | Key programming


Label | Print

Label allows you to print key labels for your telephones.


To access the dialog box, select the Key programming tab and then select the Label option.
Click the Print button.
A dialog appears where you can select the telephones and attached key modules for which you
want to print the key assignment.
In a network, you can choose whether you want to print the key assignment for all or selected
telephones.

Column: Print
Select the ports for which key labeling should be printed.

Column: BLF / EKL


Select the ports for which key labeling should additionally be printed for the key modules add-
ed.

All stations
All ports are selected for which key labeling is to be printed.

Print on printed form? (without frame)


Prints the label without a frame.

See also
– Section 6.2.2, “Key programming”, on page 6-13

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-23
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

6.2.5 Terminal hw sw version

Settings | Set up station | Endpoint hw sw version

The hardware/software version of the terminals is made up of the current OpenStage SW


versions in MMC and a table, in which the number, the name, the type, the location as well as
the current software and hardware version of the terminals are displayed.
The table is often not fully visible. In order to see all entries, use the horizontal scroll function
or reduce the width of the columns by moving the column separators.

6.2.5.1 Area » Current OpenStage SW Versions in MMC«


The current software version is displayed here which is available on the MMC card for upgrad-
ing OpenStage T devices.

6.2.5.2 Table

Call Number column


The internal number of each IP terminal is displayed here. No number is displayed for IP ter-
minals which have been added to Manager E but which are not yet registered in the system.

Name column
This column displays the name of the station.

Type column
This column displays the terminal type of OpenStage and optiPoint IP telephones.

Column: Current SW Version


The current software version of the OpenStage and optiPoint IP terminals registered on the
system is displayed here. No software version is displayed for IP terminals which have been
added to Manager E but which are not yet registered in the system.

Column: HW Version
The hardware version of the OpenStage terminals which are registered on the system is dis-
played here.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-24 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

Column: Access
The slot location of the respective IP terminal is displayed here.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-25
settings02.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Set up station

6.2.6 Emergency

Settings | Setup station | Emergency

Emergency enables you to control the behavior of the IP Workpoint clients (system cli-
ents) within the framework of the SRS concept ( Small Remote Sites). A detailed description
of the SRS concept can be found in the manual "HiPath 3000/5000, Feature Description".

Emergency text
Enter the text (max. 15 characters) to be displayed on the system clients in the event of an
emergency (failure of the HiPath 4000) here.

Workpoint Clients table


The table shows all the system clients that have been set up.

Call No. column


The internal call number of each station is shown here.

Name column
The name assigned to the station is shown here.

CFSS-Destination column
You can select a forwarding destination for each station via the drop-down list. If the system
client is not working (e.g. because the PC on which OpenScape Personal Edition is running
has been shut down), calls will be forwarded to the specified destination.
The local call number may not be entered as a target. If a station with the same call number is
entered as a CFSS target in another system, this call number must be unique within the system.
It should not conflict with the internal dial plan. A call number of this type must then be assigned
a prefix (or seizure code) that is configured in the LCR dial plan.

See also
– Section 6.2.1, “Subscriber”, on page 6-9

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-26 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings02.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Set up station

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-27
settings025.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Cordless (Not in the USA)

6Settings Menu

6.3 Settings | Cordless (Not in the USA)

Settings | Cordless

Settings | Cordless can be used to set the parameters for Cordless.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Cordless | System-wide
● Cordless | SLC

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-28 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings025.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Cordless (Not in the USA)

6.3.1 Cordless | System-wide

Settings | Cordless | System-wide

System-wide contains system parameters for Cordless (CMI).

6.3.1.1 Area: CMI data

System ID
The System ID is entered in this field as an 8-digit hexadecimal digit sequence.
The following applies here:

1st. digit E/ARC Access Right Class


2nd. - 5th. digits EIC Equipment Installers Code
6th. - 7th. digits FPN Fixed Part Number
8th. digit FPS Fixed Part Subscriber

The entry must have 8 digits.


>
PP Deviation Control
Echoes often occur when VoIP calls are made using DECT handsets.The "PP Deviation Con-
trol" function can be activated to suppress/minimize these echoes. This function affects all
DECT handsets connected to the HiPath 3000 communications systems. The activation or de-
activation only takes affect for a handset when it is turned off and turned back on.
The function can be used with Gigaset S3 professional, Gigaset SL3 professional, Gigaset S4
professional and newer handsets.
In "Deactivate" mode echo suppression does not work and echoes can occur when VoIP calls
are made using DECT handsets. By default the function is deactivated.

See also
– Section 6.3.2, “Cordless | SLC”, on page 6-30

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-29
settings025.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Cordless (Not in the USA)

6.3.2 Cordless | SLC

Settings | Cordless | SLC

The parameters for the SLC16 card can be configured via SLC. All cordless cards are dis-
played in the system.

6.3.2.1 Table SLC

System ID Node ID/System ID of the system. -


For systems that have already been
configured, the system ID entered in
the CDB is displayed. This need not
be identical to the node ID, but
should be unique in a network of mul-
tiple systems.
Slot Slots of the inserted SLC16 cards -
SLC16 no. Unique system-wide ID number of The range of values is: 1-15, 17-31,
the SLC card 33-47, ..., 127 (multiples of 16 are not
allowed).
Number of PPs Number of Portable Parts (PP). -
The number of portable parts can be
increased in the Portable Parts area
SLC Call no. Unique system-wide call number of
the S0 extension line
Access Name, number and slot of the S0 ex- -
tension line

6.3.2.2 Area: Portable Parts (mobile telephones)


The parameters of the portable parts (PPs or mobile telephones) are displayed in the table..
You can then choose to display either the mobile telephones of the SLC card selected in the
table per SLC in Slot) or all mobile telephones (All).

Call Number Call no. of the mobile phone -


Name Name of the mobile phone -
Mobil code PIN code to log on the mobile telephone. configurable
The mobile code must be
unique system-wide.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-30 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings025.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Cordless (Not in the USA)

Access Name, number and slot for the S0 extension -


line

Status display of the PP


An icon in front of the mobile code displays the status. The following combinations are possible:

Port active PP registered Status display Meaning


no yes (green) OK

yes yes (red) Board lockswitch set for registered PP

no no (yellow) PP was automatically logged off by a


change to the PIN in the Manager E.
yes no (gray) No PP was ever registered on this port.

Add
If the number of portable parts is less than the (version-dependent) size allowed in the system,
then the field next to the Add button can be used to enter and add an additional number of por-
table parts (per card).

Deleting PPs
The Portable Parts selected in the table are removed from the system with Delete.

Fill Mobile Code


The Fill Mobile Code button is used to automatically generate the PIN codes for registering
mobile telephones. The PIN for the mobile code is generated from the call number of the sta-
tion. No mobile code is generated for stations without call numbers; the mobile codes must be
entered manually in such cases.

See also:
– Section 6.3.1, “Cordless | System-wide”, on page 6-29

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-31
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

6Settings Menu

6.4 Settings | Least Cost Routing

Settings | Least Cost Routing

Settings | Least Cost Routing can be used to determine LCR parameters.


The Automatic Least cost routing (LCR) function enables the communication system to auto-
matically control via which route the outgoing call will be routed. The call may be routed via the
public network, various network providers or via a private network. This ensures that the most
cost-effective connection is always automatically used in relation to the dialed destination.
The dialed call number is used as the criterion for the connection path to be used. The commu-
nication system can evaluate up to 24 digits of the digit sequence plus up to 9 field separators.
The digit sequence that can be dialed can consist of up to 32 digits. The evaluation can be car-
ried out both destination-dependently and time-dependently and in dependence on the sta-
tion’s LCR classes of service.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Flags and COS
● Dial plan
● Schedule

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-32 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

6.4.1 Flags and COS

Settings | Least Cost Routing Flags and COS

The automatic LCR is activated via Flags and COS and the LCR authorization for each indi-
vidual station determined.

6.4.1.1 Class of service table

Call No. (call number) column


All call numbers in the communication system are listed in this column.

Name column
The station names that are allocated to the call numbers are listed here.

Class of service column


An LCR class-of-service (1-15) can be assigned to each station which is evaluated by means
of the route table when a route is being seized. The assigned level must be equal to or greater
than the level associated with the Route group selected to gain access to the service.

6.4.1.2 LCR authorization codes table


The authorization codes or P.I.N (Personal Identification Number) allocated to the individual
network providers are transmitted together with the call number.

Index column
Consecutive digits are entered here in accordance with the respective network provider. In the
dial rule, the entries M1-M16 refer to index 1-16.

P.I.N. column
Sixteen authorization codes of not more than 16 characters (ASCII characters) can be entered
for the various network providers.

6.4.1.3 Area: LCR - flags, Activate LCR


Automatic least cost routing can be activated with Activate LCR.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-33
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

6.4.1.4 Digit Transmission area (HiPath 3000/5000 V7 R4)


The type of digit transmission is established here throughout the system.

Digit-by-digit
The digits are transmitted in sync with dialing.

En-bloc sending
During en-block sending digit transmission, the digits are cached by the communication sys-
tem. Dialing only takes place when a timer has elapsed after the last digit has been dialed,
when the end-of-dial code # has been entered or if an exact match in the dial rule is found. In
the case of PRI in the USA block dialing to the central office is mandatory.

See also:
– Section 6.4.2, “Dial plan”, on page 6-35
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-34 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

6.4.2 Dial plan

Settings | Least Cost Routing | Dial plan

For external connections, each call number including the code (up to a maximum of the 30th.
character incl. field separators) is checked in the dial plan. The dial plan then determines a
route table for the station; the station is assigned this table for the connection setup. Up to 16
routes are created via a single route table. The Dialing rules table defines how the digits se-
lected by the station are converted and dialed by the communication system.
The station can cancel automatic selection by seizing a line directly (Carrier Select Override -
CSO). If Internet telephony is set up via one or more ITSPs, a connection via the Internet is set
up with the CO code, "0". In this case a connection via ISDN or the analog trunk connection is
possible using the special CO code, "80".
The LCR class-of-service cannot be transferred between CorNet-networked communication
systems.

6.4.2.1 Table above (Call number evaluation for external connections)

Name column
The Name column can be used to assign a name to each profile, e.g., local call, long-distance
call, international, etc. Depending on the version of the communication system, the Name col-
umn may or may not be displayed.
A meaningful name should be selected when assigning names. Multiple instances of the same
name may be used. Appropriate names are automatically assigned via the Dial Rule wizard.

Dialed digits column


The Dialed digits column specified the call number evaluation. Call numbers should be defined
using the Digit Analysis wizard. To open the Dial Rule wizard, double-click the corresponding
entry in the Dialed digits column or select an entry and then click the Dial rule wizard button.
A description of the Dial rule wizard can be found in Section 6.4.2.3, “Digit Analysis Wizard”,
on page 6-39.

Route table column


The Route table column is used to specify which route table is to be used for the profile. The
definition of the route tables then occurs via the table below (Route table).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-35
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

Acc. code (Account code) column


The Yes/No setting in this column determines whether or not an account code entry is manda-
tory after the seizure code (in USA: after end-of-dialing). If the No is selected, the account code
is not required until the dial plan has been dialed completely if it has been configured for the
route Call charges.../Account codes (see Account codes). An appropriate user prompt appears
on telephones with a display.
ACCT entries must completed with Apply only if the entry is "unverified". The entry is saved
automatically for "list verification" Call charges.../Account codes (see (Account codes) or "digit
verification" Call charges.../Account codes (see Account codes).

For LCR configuration, note that all digits illustrate the Access Code (field E1) up to
> the first separator.

Example: Station dials 2xx


a) Dial plan "2XX", dialing rule "A" => AccessCode="2xx", rest of dialing="" => "" is dialed!
b) Dial plan “2XX“, Dial rule “E1“ => AccessCode=“2xx“, rest of dialing=““ => “2xx“ is di-
aled
c) Dial plan “-2XX“, Dial rule “A“ => AccessCode=““, rest of dialing=“2xx“ => “2xx“ is di-
aled
d) Dial plan “2-XX“, Dial rule “E1A“ => AccessCode=“2“, rest of dialing=“xx“ => “2xx“ is
dialed
The splitting up of the dialed digits in Access Code and rest of dialing is only changed by
an alteration of the LCR - dial plan.

COS column (toll restriction)


The COS (toll restriction) controls activation of the toll restriction. This applies to networking,
as well as to standalone communication systems. With this, individual call numbers can be re-
moved from the toll restriction. If the toll restriction should be applied, the known rules regarding
the Allowed / Denied Lists apply (see Allowed/Denied numbers).

Emergency Column
If a number that was configured as an emergency number (dialed digits, emergency col-
umn=yes) is dialed, and no free line is available, then a line that is being used for a non-emer-
gency number (emergency column =no) is disconnected and then made available automatical-
ly for the emergency number.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-36 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

6.4.2.2 Lower table (Route table)


Each path/route is described by a combination of routes, dial rules, LCR class-of-service,
schedule and the designation of an expensive route. The LCR class-of-service is evaluated hi-
erarchically for LCR. The route table is searched from top to bottom. If the route located is
seized, or if the station does not have the necessary authorization, the next route is tried.
If the use of an entry fails because the route is not available, insufficient classes of service or
not matching schedule, the next entry will be used, until all criteria match and the call can be
established. When moving from one entry to the next, a warning about a more expensive con-
nection may be announced if this has been configured for the overflow entry.

Route table drop-down list


The Route table drop-down list is used to select the appropriate route table, which can then be
edited in the table.
The type of digit transmission is displayed on the bottom right end of second table as static (e.g.
route table 6: en-bloc sending).

Route column
The route is selected here.

Dial rule column


The dial rule is selected here. Dial rules should be defined by using the Dial rule wizard. To
open the Dial Rule wizard, select an entry in the Dial rule column and then click the Dial rule
wizard button. A description of the Dial Rule wizard can be found in Section 6.4.2.4, “Dial rule
wizard”, on page 6-41.

min. COS column (Class of service)


The min. COS describes the minimum LCR class-of-service needed by a station in order to use
the associated route. It is thus possible to stipulate, for example, that one station is only permit-
ted to place calls via a specific carrier or during certain times, while other stations have the op-
tion of using alternative routes.

Schedule column
A time zone is entered here which is compared with the LCR schedule (see Schedule) If the
comparison does not yield a match, the route is not enabled. Instead, the next route (next line)
in the route table is tried. If a time zone has not been entered, the route is used without referring
to the LCR time plan.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-37
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

Warning column
You define here whether a warning is to be output if an expensive connection (route) is being
set up, and which warning should be selected. The warning Expensive connection is only dis-
played if a name has not been configured for the associated dial rule. If a name has been con-
figured, it is displayed.

See also:
– Section 6.4.2.3, “Digit Analysis Wizard”, on page 6-39
– Section 6.4.2.4, “Dial rule wizard”, on page 6-41
– Section 6.4.3, “Schedule”, on page 6-48
– Section 6.4.2.4, “Network provider’s method of access”, on page 6-42
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50
– Section 6.6.3, “Allowed/Denied numbers”, on page 6-70
– Section 7.2.4, “Account codes”, on page 7-22

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-38 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

6.4.2.3 Digit Analysis Wizard


The Digit Analysis wizard is used to define call number evaluation for external connections.
To call the wizard, click Settings | Least Cost Routing | Dial plan and then:
● double-click in the Dialed digits column
● or select the Dialed digits column and click the Dial rule wizard button
● or select it via the context menu (right mouse click) of the Dialed digits column

Profiles
Some profiles are already predefined. You can use the options to select for which connections
a call number evaluation is to occur, e.g., City for all local calls.
The User-defined option can be used to create profiles in addition to those already predefined.

Name
The name for the profile is specified via Name. The predefined profiles are already assigned
names.

Dialed digits
Dialed digits specifies to which call number(s) the dial rule applies.
The following entries are permitted for the call number(s):
– 0...9 (permitted digits)
– - (field separator)
– X (any digit between 0...9)
– N (any digit between 2...9)
– Z (one or more digits follow up to end-of-dialing)
– C (simulated dial tone (cannot be entered more than 3 times))

# within a dial string indicates end-of-dialing or switching of the signaling method;


> therefore * and # are not taken into account as entries here.

In order to access all available functions, a field separator, "-”, must be placed between the
route code and the number you wish to dial.
When configuring LCR for a network, the dial plan for internal network call numbers should al-
ways be configured without access codes.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-39
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

Except
Except is specify exceptions, i.e., to which of the call numbers specified under Dialed digits the
dial rule should not be applied.
Example using City:
Dialed digits: 0CZ
Except: 0C0Z
The dial rule applies only to local calls. If the value 0C0Z were not specified under Except,
the dial rule would apply to all external calls, i.e., even long-distance calls, for example.

Set Route table, Acc. code, COS and Emergency to Standard


If this option is activated (Standard), the values in the corresponding columns are reset to de-
fault values, i.e., no route table, Acc. code: no, COS; yes, emergency call: no
If the option is deactivated, a further dialog box is displayed in which the appropriate values can
be selected.

See also:
– Section 6.4.2, “Dial plan”, on page 6-35

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-40 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

6.4.2.4 Dial rule wizard


The Dial rule wizard is used to define dialing rules for the call number evaluation for external
connections.
To call the Dial rule wizard, click Settings | Least Cost Routing | Dial plan and then:
● Double-click in the column Dial rule
● or select the Dial rule column and click the Dial rule wizard button
● or select it via the context menu (right mouse click) of the Dial rule column
The appropriate method for dialing different network providers (carriers) depends on their tech-
nical specifications. To determine which method is supported and which parameters need to
be specified for it, please contact the network carrier or refer to their relevant intranet pages.
Examples for network providers in Germany:

Network provider: Deutsche Telekom


Network provider’s method of access Main network supplier
Access code:
Dial rule format: A

Network provider: Arcor


Network provider’s method of access MCL single-stage
Access code: 01070
Dial rule format: C,01070A

Edited dial rule


Here you select which dial rule is to be edited. The displayed dial rule name (by default, Dial
rule 1...254) can also be edited here. To do this, select the dial rule first and then enter a new
name for it.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-41
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

Network provider’s method of access


The method used by individual network providers is entered here.

Procedure Description Example


Unknown
Main network sup- When seizing a line via the main network provider, sim- A
plier ple dialing is carried out either block-by-block or by di-
aling individual digits into the public network.
MCL single-stage With this type of LCR, the required network provider is C123A
selected with a prefix and the call number is then di-
aled via the D-channel in the case of ISDN or via the
normal channel in the case of the MSI.
MCL two-stage With two-stage LCR, the required network provider is C131SP6M1A
also selected with a prefix. Following a synchronization
phase a configurable authorization code is first trans-
mitted, followed by the destination call number (DT-
MF).
Corporate Network In the case of the Corporate Network, the alternative E1A
(CN) network is directly connected to the Hicom 150 E Of-
fice/HiPath 3000. This refers to the internal network of
the company. The LCR function establishes the rele-
vant route from the number dialed by the station and
routes the call either via the trunk group of the public
CO or via the trunk group with the corporate network.
Both an open and a closed numbering system can be
implemented using this method by means of digit ma-
nipulation.
Dial-in control With this type of LCR the required network provider is UM2A
server (DICS) dialed with a prefix via a Dial In Control Server (DICS)
and in the process the call number and a configurable
authorization code is transmitted in the subaddress.
The number is dialed via the D channel.
Primary rate inter- In the case of Primary Rate Interface, the carrier or the A
face (PRI) calling service is selected in the SETUP via the infor-
mation elements Network Specific Facility, Operator
System Access and Transit Network Selection.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-42 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

If Main network supplier is selected as the procedure in the dialing rules table, for-
7 warding in the Route table will not work for the entries after the route programmed
as the main network provider.
Normally in a Primary Rate Interface (PRI) environment, the central office does not
require the 1 for long distance calls or 011 for international calls to be sent before the
dialed number. In cases where the public network provider requires the 1 for long
distance calls or the 011 for international calls, additional dial rules need to be cre-
ated for long distance calls (D1A) and for international calls (D011A).

Access code, Pause (max. 12 sec.), Authorization code


Depending on the procedure of the network provider, further parameters required for the dial
rule must be specified.

Dial rule format


The dial rules make it possible to actually access the various carriers by manipulating the digits.
The dial rules address the fields of the dial plan directly in order to retry, suppress, exchange
or insert digits. Other operations include the insertion of pauses, switching the signaling meth-
od or identification of the dial tone.
The dial rules are defined via the following special characters:

Parameter A All repeat remaining


fields
A ensures that all subsequent digit fields are transmitted. (transmit)
The reference point is the last field indicator preceding A.
A can occur more than once in the string and can be
placed in any position. The AA combination is meaning-
less and has the same effect as A.
Parameter D (n) Dial Dial digit sequence
(1 to 25 digits)
D (n) can occur more than once in the string and can be
placed in any position. D (n) can be surrounded by any
other parameters.
Parameter E (n) Echo retry field in dial plan
(Number 1 to 10)
E (n) can occur more than once in the string and can be
placed in any position. E (n) can be arranged in any order,
depending on n. A determining field can be addressed
more than once, even consecutively. With the exception of
the E1 A combination, E (n) can be surrounded by any
other parameters.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-43
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

Parameter P (n) Pause Pause


(1 to 60 times the sys-
P(n) can occur more than once in the string and can be tem-wide pause unit)
placed in any position. P (n) can be surrounded by any
other parameters.
Parameter M (n) Authorization Code
(1 to 16)
M (n) can occur only once in the string. M (n) should not
be placed in the final position in the string.
Parameter S Switch Switch signaling
method from DP to
S can occur only once in the string. S should not be DTMF
placed in the final position in the string. After using S in the
string, the C parameter may not be used.
Parameter U Use of the signaling
method SUBaddress
U can occur only once in the string. U should not be
placed in the final position in the string. The subsequent
characters are re-selected in INFO. After U the parame-
ters S, P, C and M may not be used.
Parameter C Carrier Access code
C can occur only once in the string. After C the following
digits are sent without dial pause. C is used for carrier ac-
cess with single stage, two stage, DICS and PRI.

USA only:

Parameter N (n) Network- SFG (1 to5) or


specific Band Number (1)
N (n) can occur only once in the string. N should not be facility
placed in the first position in the string. Depending on the
service to be used, N designates the SFG.
Parameter L Location The call is treated
identification as an emergency
L can only occur at the end of a string of characters. L number (E911)
causes the call to be handled as an emergency call.

min. COS Time slots, Warning


This drop-down list corresponds to the respective columns in the route table (see Section 6.4.2,
“Dial plan”, on page 6-35).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-44 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

Type of Number [TON]


For each dial rule, the following types of number from "Called Party Number" can be selected
from the drop-down list:
● PABX number
● Local area code
● Country Code
"Unknown" is the default entry.
Sample options:
● Example:
If the rule format "D492302667…" is entered, the TON "Country code" must be set. For
the TON "Local Area Code" the rule format "D2302667…" should be configured, for exam-
ple.
● Example - Called number supply:
The called number (DAD) is configured via LCR, PABX number incoming:
The number 0-089-722-4711 is dialed. The following should be sent: 49 89 722 4711. The
dial plan contains 0C0-89722Z. The dial rule contains D49E3A and the type of number -
country code (international).

The type of number is only set in E.164. In a conventional network, parameters are
> set to "Unknown".

Rule for forwarding within the route table depending on the procedure configured in the
route table
● Connection release in all cases:

CAUSE VALUE Description Type


VT_CALL_REJECTED Rejected internal
VT_NO_ACCESS No authorization, e.g. CON internal
VT_NICHT_MOEG Not available internal
DERR_LINEBUSY Line busy internal
If an entry is made in the MCL single stage or MCL two stage route table, external connec-
tions are forwarded for all CAUSE values. (Note: this refers to standard causes in accor-
dance with the ISDN standard ETS 300 102-1/2)

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-45
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

● Entry # in the Corporate Network route table:

CAUSE VALUE Description Type


CAU_03_NO_ROUTE_TO_DESTINATION Invalid route external
CAU_06_CHANNEL_NOT_ACCEPTABLE Unknown B-channel external
CAU_34_NO_CHANNEL_AVAILABLE No B-channel available external
CAU_38_NETWORK_OUT_OF_ORDER Network is not available external
CAU_41_TEMPORARY_FAILURE Temporarily out of service external
CAU_42_SWITCHING_CONGESTION Connection is overloaded external
CAU_44_CHANNEL_NOT_AVAILABLE Channel is not available external
CAU_47_RESOURCES_UNAVAILABLE Service is not available external
CAU_52_OUTGOING_CALL_BARRED Route is blocked external
CAU_63_SERVICE_NOT_AVAILABLE Service is not available external
CAU_82_CHANNEL_NOT_EXISTENT Channel does not exist external
CAU_102_RECOVERY_ON_TIMER_EXPIRY Security timer has expired external
(layer 3)
● Entry in the dialing rules table (recommended for use in Germany):

CAUSE VALUE Description Type


CAU_03_NO_ROUTE_TO_DESTINATION Invalid route external
CAU_21_CALL_REJECTED Call is rejected external
CAU_28_INVALID_NUMBER_FORMAT Invalid call number format external
CAU_34_NO_CHANNEL_AVAILABLE No B-channel available external
CAU_38_NETWORK_OUT_OF_ORDER Network is not available external
CAU_41_CHANNEL_NOT_AVAILABLE Channel is not available external
CAU_66_CHA_TYP_NOT_IMPLEMENTED Channel type is not supported external
CAU_88_INCOMPATIBLE_DESTINATION Invalid route external
CAU_102_RECOVERY_ON_TIMER_EXPIRY Security timer has expired external
(layer 3)

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-46 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

● Entry in the dialing rules table for the main station:

CAUSE VALUE Description Type


CAU_03_NO_ROUTE_TO_DESTINATION Invalid route external
CAU_34_NO_CHANNEL_AVAILABLE No B-channel available external
CAU_38_NETWORK_OUT_OF_ORDER Network is not available external
CAU_41_CHANNEL_NOT_AVAILABLE Channel is not available external
CAU_44_CHANNEL_NOT_AVAILABLE Channel is not available external

See also:
– Section 6.4.2, “Dial plan”, on page 6-35

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-47
settings04.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Least Cost Routing

6.4.3 Schedule

Settings | Least Cost Routing | Schedule

A schedule (with up to 8 time slots per day) may be configured for controlling the LCR. You can
configure these time slots for every day of the week. The first time slot of any given day begins
at 00:00 and ends with the entry in the time limit. A time zone is assigned to each time slot. The
next time slot begins when the previous one ends.
Example for a time plan:

Monday 12:30 A 16:45 B 23:59 A --- ---


Tuesday 23:59 A --- --- --- ---
:
Sunday 23:59 A --- --- --- ---
Selection of the route is unsuccessful if the time zone in the route table in the dial plan does not
match the time zone of the current time slot.

6.4.3.1 Schedule table


Time slots can be entered into the schedule by "drawing" them with a mouse or via a dialog
box. If the maximum number of time slots allowed is exceed for a given day, the time slots are
not created.
To "draw" a time slot in the schedule, first mark an area in the schedule and then select a time
zone by clicking on one of the buttons (A-H) to the right of the schedule.
To insert a time slot via a dialog, double-click on the area in the schedule where the time slot is
to be inserted. A dialog box in which you can enter the start and end time and select the time
zone is displayed.
Existing time slots - even across multiple days - can be marked and moved to another position
in the schedule (if possible). If moving an area results in the creation of an undefined gap, the
preceding time slot is extended accordingly.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-48 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings04.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Least Cost Routing

6.4.3.2 Context menu

Copy Existing time slots - even across multiple days - can be marked and
Paste then copied. To do this, simply mark the area and select Copy from
the context menu. You can then use Paste to insert (paste) the copied
area into the schedule at the current position. Instead of using the
context menu to copy and paste, you can also use the standard key-
board shortcuts Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V, respectively.
Copy to all weekdays The copied area is copied to all weekdays. If the time slots cannot be
copied for any particular day (because other time slots already exist,
for example), then that day is omitted.
Delete this weekday All time slots of the marked weekday are deleted.
Clear all The entire schedule is deleted.
Set resolution Defines the chronological resolution (units of 1, 15, 30 or 60 minutes).
A-H Sets a time zone.

See also:
– Section 6.4.2, “Dial plan”, on page 6-35
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-49
settings05.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Incoming calls

6Settings Menu

6.5 Settings | Incoming calls

Settings | Incoming calls

Settings | Incoming calls can be used to set the parameters for Call Management (CM). Call
numbers can be administered in the Call Management. These call numbers can be assigned
to extensions or groups. Each extension, independent of the telephone type, receives one sta-
tion number. The trunk connections can be reserved for analog lines (MSI) or ISDN connec-
tions. If S0 lines are inserted, then one line per B-channel is counted in the Call Management,
i.e., an S0 connection has two lines for the Call Management.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Call Pickup
● Call forwarding
● Groups/hunt groups
– Groups/Hunt groups | External destinations
● UCD groups
● MULAP groups

See also:
– Section 6.7.2, “Intercept / Attendant”, on page 6-82

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-50 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings05.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Incoming calls

6.5.1 Call Pickup

Settings | Incoming calls | Call pickup

Call pickupgroups can be created via Call pickup. When stations are collected into call pickup
groups, a call to any member of the group is signaled to all members. However, the extension
that is being called is the only station that will actually ring. The call is signaled to other mem-
bers initially by a flashing LED next to the pickup key and, on display-model system telephones,
by a display message. Then, if the call is not answered after a specified period of time, a tone
sounds at all of the member stations.

6.5.1.1 Call pickup group


They are numbered Group 1, Group 2, Group 3, and so on. You select the group number by
clicking on the number you want to use in the Call Pickup Group list.

6.5.1.2 Selection and Members table


Selection contains the stations of the communication system.
Members contains the stations of the selected call pickup group. A station can only be a mem-
ber of one call pickup group.
To assign a station to a call pickup group, select the relevant station in the Selection table and
add it to the Member table with the -> button. The group membership is then displayed in the
Group column of the Selection table.
To delete a station from a call pickup group, select the relevant station in the Member table and
delete it with the <- button from the Member table.

See also
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50
– Section 6.5.3, “Groups/hunt groups”, on page 6-56

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-51
settings05.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Incoming calls

6.5.2 Call forwarding

Settings | Incoming calls | Call forwarding

Call forwarding (RNA) can be used if the station does not respond to a call within a given time
(this time can be set). The call is then automatically forwarded to the call forwarding destination
that has been entered. Calls can be forwarded to another station or hunt group, for example.

A call destination list may be assigned to multiple stations/groups.


> Changes made to the entries in specific call destination list will thus affect all the sta-
tions/groups to which it was assigned.
As of HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0, the "Call dest. list" is no longer followed for an H.323 client. In
other words, if an H.323 client calls a station where call forwarding has been configured, the
call will be signaled only at the dialed station. Call forwarding will not occur. An H.323 client can.
however, still have call forwarding.
Example:
– Scenario 1: An H.323 client (station A) calls station B. The first destination in the call
dest. list of station B is station C. In this case, the physical station B is called.
– Scenario 2: Station A (system telephone) calls station B (H.323 client). The first desti-
nation in the call dest. list of station B is station C. In this case, station C is called.

6.5.2.1 Call destination lists - Definition table


The call destination lists define how incoming calls for the assigned station or assigned group
are handled. Different entries are possible for internal and external calls (day or night).

No. column
Number of the Call destination list.

Target 1 > Target 4 column


All four columns of the CFW destinations have the same classes of service. Blank fields are
ignored. An asterisk (*) is identical to the entry for the selected call number. The entry # refers
to a system search of all stations except for the ’executive’-extension.
The fields of the call forwarding destinations (Target 1 - Target 4) can each contain the entries
listed below:
– non entry
– an external destination (see Entering external targets)
– * (asterix), identical to called station

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-52 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings05.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Incoming calls

– **, identical to user defined (call forwarding after time)


– #9, system search run through all stations except for the ’executive’-extension
– targeted call number of a station or a group
– #201 - #260 or #450, call distribution group (UCD group)
– #801 - #816 or #864, Ann. device
Target 1 cannot be changed in Manager C.

Entering external targets


External targets are also entered via the Target 1 - Target 4 columns. If you want to enter an
external destination, select the entry External destination in the corresponding column. A win-
dow in which you can enter the external destination appears. Enter the external destinationein
entweder:
– Either: with a preceding trunk or seizure code (if LCR (Least Cost Routing) is ausge-
schaltetem activated)
– oder Or: with a preceding CO code and specifying a route (if LCR is eingeschaltetem
not activated).
Cycles column
The CFW time is defined in the Cycles column. This time is only measured in multiples of
5 seconds; the Cycles entry specifies the multiplier. The communication system is preset to 3
ring cycles, i.e., a call is forwarded after 3 x 5 seconds = 15 seconds.
If the destination involved is a UCD, this column is not used. Instead, call forwarding is based
on the mechanisms of the primary and secondary call cycles (see UCD groups).

SR (second ringer) Target column


An additional station can be called by means of the SR Target entry. This entry supports the
"common ringer" function. An actuator (relay) of an actuator/sensor option or an additional sta-
tion number at which a call is also to be signaled is entered here.

SR (second ringer) Type column


The SR Type column defines when ringing assignment takes place. The options are: immedi-
ate call connection or connection after CFW timeout.
It is not possible to link the CFW. i.e., if a station is listed in a CFW destination and has a call
allocation with CFW of its own, only the originally selected CFW is performed.

CFW column
The CFW column can be used to select whether or not call forwarding on busy should be im-
plemented.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-53
settings05.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Incoming calls

It is not possible to link the CFW. This means that if a station listed as a CFW destination has
also activated ringing assignment with CFW, only the original forwarding operation is per-
formed.

6.5.2.2 Area: Call dest. list - Station assignment


In this table, call destination lists are assigned for the stations and groups. Here you can select
to display either all stations/groups or only the stations/groups which are already assigned in
the Call dest. list - Definition table of the selected call destination lists.
Three call destination lists can be assigned to each station or station group in the communica-
tion system:
– an internal call (also for networked systems)
– an external call during day service
– an external call during night service

It is important not to confuse call destination list numbers with call numbers. The call
> destination list number is the number of the call destination list assigned to the sta-
tion. The call number is the station number or group number of the station.

Call No. column


The station number or the group number are entered here.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-54 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings05.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Incoming calls

Name column
This is the name associated with the station or group number. Symbols are used to identify
whether an entry as a station or a group:
– Symbol for Stations
– Symbol for hunt group

Day column
The call destination list number that is to be used for incoming external calls during business
hours. Call destination list 14 is set as the default in the communication system.

Night column
This is the number of the Call destination list that is to be used for incoming external calls when
night answer is in effect. Call destination list 15 is set as the default in the communication sys-
tem.

Internal column
This is the number of the call destination list that is to be used for all internal calls. Call desti-
nation list 16 is set as the default in the communication system.

See also:
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50
– Section 6.5.3, “Groups/hunt groups”, on page 6-56

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-55
settings05.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Incoming calls

6.5.3 Groups/hunt groups

Settings | Incoming calls | Groups/Hunt groups

Groups/Hunt groups is used to create groups and hunt groups for which multiple stations can
be reached under one call number each. This call number can be also a code. Within each
communication system, certain call numbers are reserved for groups or hunt groups, and can-
not be used for individual stations. The last 60 groups can also be used for UCD applications.
Note that in order to support IVM cards with up to 24 channels, the first group must be used,
since the corresponding number of ports is only supported for the first group.
A station can belong to several groups/hunt groups, but groups cannot be entered as members
of other groups. (Exception: Basic MULAP and Executive MULAP groups can be recorded as
members of hunt groups.) External call numbers can be entered, too.
After a hunt group has been set up with IVM stations, download to the IVM is started automat-
ically after the CDB has been transferred to the communication system.
Note that if both system telephones as well as mobile telephones are configured in a group, the
mobile phones must be configured first in the case of Dect-Light (e.g., in a HiPath 3300/3500).

6.5.3.1 Group table


Group contains the parameters for the groups/hunt groups.

Index column
Index of the group. The index is also displayed when checking for potential conflicts (Check but-
ton).

Call No. column


The call number for the respective group can be specified here.

DID column
You can enter a direct inward dialing call number for each call number in the DID (Direct Inward
Dialing) column. In this case, direct inward dialing means that an external station reaches a
hunt group with its call number + the direct inward dialing call number.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-56 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings05.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Incoming calls

Name column
You can define a name for the group in the Name column. Groups / hunt groups are frequently
named for some aspect that the stations have in common. Examples: "Sales", "Support", "Lo-
gistics". When there is a call, the name of the called hunt group appears on the display panel
of the telephones.

Type column

Linear Incoming calls ring first at one station and then another in the sequence in
which the members were entered in the group table. Incoming calls always
start at the first group station and are passed along to the next station until a
free station is found.
The time between the calls is the same as the RNA time.
Cyclic Incoming calls ring first at one station and then another in the sequence in
which the members were entered in the group table. In this case, each new
call starts at the location where the last call ended.
Group Incoming calls are signaled at all available stations simultaneously. (An avail-
able station is one that is not busy.)
RNA (Call forwarding) - Incoming calls ring simultaneously at all stations. If a station
in the RNA group is busy, the group is marked as busy. The next caller re-
ceives a busy signal.
Hunt group / group calls are only signaled at free stations. If a station is busy,
it is skipped. Call waiting is implemented for all stations in the hunt group/
group only when the entire hunt group / group is busy and call forwarding is
not possible.
Call waiting Incoming calls ring simultaneously at all available stations of the group. (Any
station that is not busy is considered to be available.) If a station of the call
waiting group is busy, the waiting call is nonetheless signaled at that station.
Voicemail A voicemail group allows a special group of stations to access voicemails. If
a call is directed to the call number of a voicemail group, the call (i.e. the voice-
mail) is forwarded directly to the voicemail box of the group and not to the
group members. Once the voicemail has been stored in the voicemail box of
the group, it is forwarded to the voicemail boxes of the group members.
All group members receive the voicemail simultaneously. If a group member
deletes the voicemail in his voicemail box, the voicemail is also deleted in the
voicemail boxes of all group members and in the voicemail box of the group.
This does not affect the personal voicemails of the individual group members.
However, every group member can also be reached under his own call num-
ber.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-57
settings05.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Incoming calls

Ring Type column


When using the Ring type entry, the call can be acoustically signaled in the group/code number
with a double ring (1), a triple ring (2) or with short/long/short (3). The set Ring type applies
only to external calls.
Changes to the setting have no meaning for analog stations.

Tel. directory column


This option determines whether the call number of the group is recorded in the telephone di-
rectory.

Check
Note that this mask also offers a Check button so that after you have finished defining your
group, you can check to see if there are any conflicts.

External destinations
The Groups/Hunt groups | External destinations dialog box is displayed in order to set up ex-
ternal destinations.

6.5.3.2 Selection and Members table


Selection contains the stations of the communication system.
Members contain the stations of the selected group.
To assign a station to a group/hunt group, select the relevant station in the Selection table and
add it via the -> button to the Member table. In the Selection list box, an asterisk (*) next to the
station number indicates a port that did not yet have a station attached when the customer da-
tabase was downloaded.
To rearrange the stations in the Members list, use the up arrow or down arrow buttons (up or
down) that are to the right of the Members list). For MULAPs, the order is only relevant in con-
nection with call pickups. When multiple members of a MULAP also belong to a call pickup
group, then the last member of the MULAP is displayed to the members of the call pickup group
on calling the MULAP.
To remove a station from a group/hunt group, select the relevant station in the Member table
and delete it via the <- button from the Member table. A MULAP must have at least one master
or executive. This is why the last master/executive cannot be removed unless it is the last re-
maining member of the group. Members in this MULAP originating in a team/top cannot be de-
leted here.
In MULAPs, master or executive stations are indicated by a + sign. The first member to be add-
ed becomes master or executive automatically.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-58 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings05.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Incoming calls

See also:
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50
– Section 6.5.4, “Groups/Hunt groups | External destinations”, on page 6-60

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-59
settings05.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Incoming calls

6.5.4 Groups/Hunt groups | External destinations

Settings | Incoming calls | Groups/Hunt groups | External destinations

External destinations is used to enter call numbers in a subsystem and a CO. If group stations
are also external stations, this group can be called by a station without CO call privileges. How-
ever, the external stations will be excluded.
External destinations can be included in a cyclical or linear hunt group, and entered in a no an-
swer group. UCD groups and MULAPs cannot be used for this purpose.

A route must be entered for each external destination (call number). Otherwise, the
> applicable hunt group cannot be reached by call forwarding from an internal sub-
scriber.

6.5.4.1 Area: Group


The name and call number of the selected group is displayed.

6.5.4.2 Members table


All internal and external stations in a group are listed.

6.5.4.3 Area: External destinations


The external destination can be entered here, where the call number may contain up to 6 digits
for seizing the line and 25 digits for dial information.

6.5.4.4 Close button


The Close button closes the dialog and returns you to the Groups/hunt groups tab. It is only on
this tab that any changes that were made can be actually applied.

See also:
– Section 6.5.3, “Groups/hunt groups”, on page 6-56

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-60 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings05.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Incoming calls

6.5.5 UCD groups

Settings | Incoming calls | UCD groups

Agents are assigned to workgroups via UCD group. Each agent can only be allocated to one
group.
The last hunt groups are used in UCD to set up a master call number, a DID number and a
group name for the individual UCD groups. Each UCD group is assigned a virtual address num-
ber beginning from #201 (to #260 or #450) under Call forwarding. The UCD group 1 (#201) can
therefore be called by dialing the default call number for Groups/hunt groups.
When an agent logs on to myAgent, he is automatically logged on to the UCD (Universal Call
Distribution) of HiPath 3000. If OpenScape Office crashes, and myAgent with it, UCD deals with
incoming calls and therefore ensures the continued functioning of the call center. If myAgent
has already crashed when an agent wants to log on, he can log on to the UCD via his tele-
phone.

6.5.5.1 Selection, Members table


Agents can be assigned to the UCD groups with the Selection and Members lists. In order to
do this, drag that respective ID from the Selection list into the Members list. Each ID can only
appear in one group.

6.5.5.2 UCD groups table


The UCD groups table enables the group-specific configuration of UCD parameters. The table
is divided into the following columns:

UCD group column


The UCD group column contains a list of the available groups.

Prim. ring cycles, Sec. ring cycles columns


The primary and secondary ring cycles can be set up for each group. The behavior depends
on whether or not further UCD groups have been configured as destinations in the respective
call destination list.
Scenario 1: A UCD group is configured only for the first destination
The Universal Call Distribution (UCD) is set up to route a call to an available agent depending
on the longest idle phase. If additional agents are available and the call was not accepted, the
call is forwarded to the next available agent after the number of cycles (5 second intervals)

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-61
settings05.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Incoming calls

specified under Primary Ring Cycle has expired. The timer for the second free agent, i.e., the
Secondary ring cycle is then started. Depending on the configuration, the agents called via
the call forwarding to the next agent are set to “not available”.
Scenario 2: One UCD group each has been configured for both the first and second destina-
tions, and free agents are available in both groups
The available agents in the first group are called as described under scenario 1. The call is then
forwarded to the next group. Call forwarding within the second group occurs here in accordance
with the Secondary ring cycle timer.
Scenario 3:One UCD group each has been configured for both the first and second destina-
tions, and no free agent is available in the first group
The call remains in the queue of the first group for the duration of the Primary ring cycle and
is then forwarded to the second group. The Secondary ring cycle timer is started, and a
search for available agents in both groups is performed. The first available agent receives the
call.

Queued calls column


The maximum number of queued calls can be set in the Queued calls column (max. value =
30).
For the last group the maximum number is 72.

AICC column
The AICC column (Automatic Incoming UCD Call Connection) is used to activate the automatic
setup of UCD calls. An acoustical signal will be transmitted to the UCD agent’s headset and the
call is automatically connected.
This feature can be activated if a headset and the Disconnect key are configured for the relevant
telephone.

Change announcement column


In this column, it is possible to specify how the recorded announcements are changed. Chang-
es can be made once or cyclic. The Announcement are sent to the caller in the configured
order. If the cyclic option is selected, the last announcement and the previous one are connect-
ed cyclically.

Overflow time column


If the external application (e.g. HPCO) does not accept the waiting call within the time period
specified here, the call is taken back by the communication system. The call is then no longer
processed in the external application but in the CM of the system.
Valid value range: 0-600s or 0-15240s as of HiPath 3000 V1.2/Hicom150 H V1.2.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-62 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings05.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Incoming calls

Announcement delay column


This timeout parameter is used to configure the delay before a queued call is switched to the
recorded announcement device. Each call to a UCD group is assigned an announcement. If no
announcement device is configured, the communication systems internal music-on-hold is ac-
tivated for the calling party. To suppress the announcement, the Ann. delay time should be con-
figured to the maximum value, assuming that the call will be answered within this time.
Valid value range: 0-600s.

6.5.5.3 Group parameters table

Destination index column


Seven Wait dest. (index 1-7) for announcement devices can be configured per group.

The internal MoH (MoH = Music on Hold) cannot be configured as the first UCD an-
> nouncement (index 1). This setting can result in problems in scenarios involving IP
network connections.

Wait destination column


The Wait dest. column is used to assign the Dest. index to the recorded announcement de-
vices in the communication system. Two types of announcement device can be configured: de-
vices with a fixed beginning and end (announcements) and tape loops (music).

Wait time column

For consultation calls in a UCD group (e.g., for unscreened transfers), announce-
> ment devices are not connected until after the call has been transferred. The trans-
ferring station is not given an announcement connection.
This option can only be used for terminals with tape loops.
A queue time can be programmed for each target. After this timeout the next configured an-
nouncement is sent to the calling party.

See also
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50
– Section 6.5.2, “Call forwarding”, on page 6-52
– Section 6.5.3, “Groups/hunt groups”, on page 6-56

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-63
settings05.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Incoming calls

6.5.6 MULAP groups

Settings | Incoming calls | MULAP groups

MULAP groups configured in Manager E and the respective members can be displayed in this
tab. The name of a MULAP group can be changed, all other displayed parameters cannot.

6.5.6.1 Groups table


In the Groups table all MULAP groups are displayed, regardless of whether or not they belong
to a team/top.
● Call No. column: MULAP group number
● Name column: Name of the MULAP group (can be changed, max. 16 characters)
● Type column: MULAP group type (basic MULAP or executive MULAP)

6.5.6.2 Members table


The Members table displays the members of the MULAP group selected in the Groups table.
● Call No. column: Station number
● Name column: Name of the station

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-64 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings06.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Classes of service

6Settings Menu

6.6 Settings | Classes of service

Settings | Classes of service

Settings | Classes of service can be used to restrict external calls. The types of calls that can
be made from each station are defined for this purpose. Some of the tabs are not directly relat-
ed to classes of service, but have a similar function, since they can be used to restrict a station’s
access to other stations and CO lines.
Setting up Classes of Service involves several steps:

Font Action
1. Station is used to assign stations for day and for night to the service groups 1
to 15.
2. Individual COS groups are assigned classes of service from via Day or Night.
The classes of service range from highly restricted to totally unrestricted ac-
cess. Each group and route (trunk group) is allocated its own classes of ser-
vice for day and night operation.
3. Create lists of allowed and denied telephone numbers (Allowed/Denied num-
bers). These lists are referenced by the classes of service “Allowed list 1-6”
and “Denied list 1-6”.
4. If toll restriction should not be activated (other than in the basic settings) for
individual call numbers, this can be set up in the Dial plan. This also applies to
networking.

The above mentioned steps can be completed in any order. You may prefer to com-
> pile your lists or define your groups before you assign your stations to groups. These
functions are highly interactive. You should have an general plan before you begin.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Station
● Day or Night
● Allowed/Denied numbers
● Autom. night service
● Special days
● autom. COS changeover

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-65
settings06.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Classes of service

6.6.1 Station

Settings | Classes of service | Stations

Stations is used to restrict access to external call numbers by assigning them to COS groups.
This is achieved by assigning the individual stations to a COS group.

6.6.1.1 Assignment of Stations to Classes of Service Groups table


To assign class of service groups, select a class of service group number from the Day and
Night drop-down list boxes. You can select one group for the Day and a different group for the
Night.
The selection that you make in the Day column will refer to the CO Call Privilege Day table
(see Day or Night), where the COS group is linked to the actual classes of service. The selec-
tion that you make in the Night column will refer to the CO Call Privilege Night table (see Day
or Night), where the COS group is linked to the actual classes of service.
There are fifteen numbers available for COS groups, but you can have more than fifteen groups
because COS Group 1 for Day and COS Group 1 for Night can be defined differently.
If the autom. COS changeover feature has been activated, then the table header changes to
"Assignment of stations to Profiles/Classes of service groups", and profiles are used instead of
class of service groups in the Day column.

It is important to remember that the number you assign to the station here is the
> number for the COS group and not the number for the COS. A class of service can
be found under class of service with active codelock.

See also:
– Section 6.6, “Settings | Classes of service”, on page 6-65
– Section 6.6.2, “Day or Night”, on page 6-67
– Section 6.6.6, “autom. COS changeover”, on page 6-75

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-66 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings06.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Classes of service

6.6.2 Day or Night

Settings | Classes of service | Day


Settings | Classes of service | Night

You use Day or Night to continue the process by assigning CO call privileges per route (trunk
group) to the individual COS groups.
The stations can be restricted in their access to external call numbers by assigning class of ser-
vice groups on the Station tab. The individual class of service groups for day and night modes
can be assigned appropriate authorizations on the Day or Night tab.

Default settings for the CO call privileges per COS group


● Germany and Greece:

COS group 1: Internal (for all routes)


COS group 2: Outward-restricted (for all routes)
COS group 3: Denied list 1 (for all routes)
COS group 4: Allowed list 1 (for all routes)
COS group 5: Denied list 2 (for all routes)
COS group 6: Denied list 3 (for all routes)
COS group 7-15: Unrestricted (for all routes)
● Other countries:

COS group 1-15: Unrestricted (for all routes)

Access for networked systems:

Class of service in the sub- Authorization that accesses the subsystem in the
system main system for the station
Internal (0) internal (0)
Outward-restricted (1) Outward-restricted (1)
Allowed list (2-7) Denied list 1 for the main system (8)
Denied list (8-13) Denied list 1 for the main system (8)
Unrestricted (14) Unrestricted (14)

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-67
settings06.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Classes of service

The Internal, Outward-restricted or Unrestricted Classes of service are adopted in the main
system. If allowance or denial is assigned to a subscriber in the sublevel, the denied list always
accesses denied list 1 in the main device during a CO connection.

6.6.2.1 Selection table


All class of service groups of the communication system are displayed in this list. When you
select one of the class of service groups, the assigned CO call privileges Day/Night as well
as the assigned stations (Members) are displayed for each route.

6.6.2.2 CO call privileges Day/Night, Route, Class of Service table


The CO call privileges are assigned in this table. A total of 15 Classes of service groups are
possible.

Route, Class of service columns


A distinction is made between the following classes of service:

Class of service Description


Internal (0) – The station can make internal calls.
– Central speed dialing is allowed.
– External incoming calls cannot be answered.
Outward-restricted (1) – The station can make internal calls.
– Central speed dialing is allowed.
– External incoming calls can be answered.
Allowed list 1-6 (2-7) – The station can make/answer the types of calls list-
ed for Code 1 (Allowed list 1-6).
– Only the numbers entered in Allowed/Denied num-
bers can be dialed.
Denied list 1-6 (8-13) – The station can make/answer the types of calls list-
ed for Code 1 (Denied list 1-6).
– All call numbers, except the entries in the Denied
list, can be dialed.
Unrestricted (14) – The station has unrestricted access for both in-
coming and outgoing calls.
All restrictions are effective only for the lines for a route of the type CO.
The digits entered in this list can be dialed from a station with the authorization level 2. The suf-
fix dialing of additional digits is not subject to any restrictions.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-68 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings06.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Classes of service

6.6.2.3 Members table


This list shows the stations assigned to the COS group selected in the Selection list (see Sta-
tion).

See also
– Section 6.6, “Settings | Classes of service”, on page 6-65
– Section 6.6.1, “Station”, on page 6-66
– Section 6.6.3, “Allowed/Denied numbers”, on page 6-70

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-69
settings06.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Classes of service

6.6.3 Allowed/Denied numbers

Settings | Classes of service | Allowed/Denied numbers

You use Allowed/Denied Numbers to build tables with call numbers that users are permitted
or not permitted to call. This step is only needed if you assigned the classes of service “Allowed
list 1-6” or “Denied list 1-6” to one of your COS groups.

6.6.3.1 Area: Allowed list


The Allowed list can be used to create tables with call numbers that can be called by the sta-
tion.A maximum of six Allowed lists can be created. Your first list can have up to one hundred
entries, and the remaining five lists can have a maximum of ten entries.
Numbers can contain up to seven digits, which can include the numbers 0 through 9 and the
symbols * and #. The complete telephone number does not need to be listed. For example, to
permit users to dial any 800 number, you would need to enter the standard code 1 (for out-of-
area) and then 800.

6.6.3.2 Area: Denied list


In the Denied list, you can create tables with call numbers that users are not permitted to call.
A maximum of six Denied list can be created. Your first list can have up to fifty entries, while the
remaining five lists can have a maximum of ten entries.
A # sign at the start of the Denied list ensures that the system telephone toll restriction is ap-
plied, where an analog CO line is to be seized using DTMF signaling, or switched to DTMF dur-
ing dialing.
Numbers can contain up to seven digits, which can include the numbers 0 through 9 and the
symbols * and #. The complete telephone number does not need to be listed. For example, to
prohibit users from dialing charge-per-minute 900 numbers, you would need to enter the stan-
dard out-of-area prefix 1 followed by 900.

Since these lists are only for outgoing external calls, it is not necessary to include
> the trunk seizure with the numbers you enter.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-70 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings06.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Classes of service

6.6.3.3 List no.


Switches between the Allowed lists or Denied lists.

6.6.3.4 Input, Change, New, Delete


To Change a number:
1. Select the number that you want to change in the Allowed/Denied list. The number is dis-
played in the Input field.
2. Overwrite the number in the Input field with the new number.
3. Click the Change button.
To create (New) a new list or to add a number to an existing list:
1. Select the list number (List no.).
2. Enter the new number in the Input field.
3. Click the New button. The new number will be added to the list.
To Delete a number:
1. Select the number that you want to delete in the Allowed/Denied list.
2. Click the Delete button. The number will be removed from list.

See also
– Section 6.6, “Settings | Classes of service”, on page 6-65

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-71
settings06.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Classes of service

6.6.4 Autom. night service

Settings | Classes of service | Autom. night service

The Autom. night service is used to define the appropriate CO call privileges per route (trunk)
via the individual class of service groups for the switchover between the day and night service.
The manual night service overrides the automatic night service,
which is configured via the schedule. The schedule covers the entire week (Monday through
Sunday) as well as special days. Special days are public holidays or special days such as com-
pany holidays of the customer (see Section 6.6.5, “Special days”, on page 6-74).
The schedule for a day can be split into 4 time intervals.
These intervals can be defined sequentially and without gaps, i.e., the end time of the first in-
terval may be identical to the start time of the second interval, for example.
However, an interval cannot have the same start and end times. The minimum length of an in-
terval is 15 minutes.
If the last interval for a day ends at 24.00 hours (12 p.m.), the end time must be entered as
23:59 (11:59). If the first interval for a day begins at 0.00 hours, then the start time must be en-
tered as 0:00.

Editing the schedule


You can select any field in the schedule by clicking in it with the left mouse button. When you
then click on the Night button to the right of the schedule, you can assign the appropriate night
call number for that field.
You can the double-click on the desired field to open the Night service dialog, in which you can
select the night call number and change the start and end times on a minute basis.
A left mouse click in a column header of the schedule, e.g., the column title Saturday, selects
the entire Saturday column. When you then click on the Night button to the right of the sched-
ule, you can assign the appropriate night call number for that column.
Clicking the Day button on the right of the schedule switches off the automatic night mode for
the selection.

6.6.4.1 Context menu


The context menu is activated by using the right mouse button.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-72 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings06.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Classes of service

Copy Existing time frames - even over multiple days - can be marked and
Paste then copied. To do this, simply mark the desired area and select Copy
from the context menu. The copied area can then be inserted (past-
ed) at the current position by using the Paste function. Instead of the
context menu, you can also use the standard keyboard shortcuts of
Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V to copy and paste, respectively.
Delete The marked areas are deleted.

Delete this weekday All time frames of the marked weekday are deleted.
Set resolution Defining the time resolution (1, 15, 30 or 60 minutes).
Day Cancels the automatic night service for the selection
Night Assigns the automatic night service to the selection

See also
– Section 6.6.5, “Special days”, on page 6-74
– Section 6.6.6, “autom. COS changeover”, on page 6-75

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-73
settings06.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Classes of service

6.6.5 Special days

Settings | Classes of service | Special days

The Special days option can be used to define certain days such as public and company hol-
idays as "special", i.e., days which need to be handled differently. Up to 50 special days can be
defined. All special days have the same fixed assigned profile.
The calendar of the current month is displayed. The current date is circled in red. If you want to
define December 25 as the special day of Christmas, for example, you would proceed as fol-
lows:
1. First mark the first free entry in the table under the Day column.
2. Then scroll through the calendar until the month of December is displayed.
3. Click on the 25th. This adds the entry into the table.
4. Enter the term Christmas under the Name column of the table.
The special days defined here will be taken into account for both the autom. night service and
for the autom. COS changeover.

See also
– Section 6.6.4, “Autom. night service”, on page 6-72
– Section 6.6.6, “autom. COS changeover”, on page 6-75

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-74 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings06.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Classes of service

6.6.6 autom. COS changeover

Settings | Classes of service | autom. COS changeover

The autom. COS Changeover feature is used to switch classes of service during the day. This
is achieved by assigning specific profiles such as Management, Purchase, Warehouse, etc., to
stations. For each profile, you can configure a separate schedule in which you define what class
of service belongs to a specific segment of the day.
The assignment of a profile to a station is described in Section 6.6.1, “Station”, on page 6-66.
The assignment of a class of service to a COS group is described in Section 6.6.2, “Day or
Night”, on page 6-67.

6.6.6.1 All database equal button


This button is used to transfer the schedule for all profiles to all other open CDBs.

6.6.6.2 Automatic COS Changeover flag


If the autom. COS Changeover flag is not set (the default), the assignment of the class of serv-
ice groups to the stations is not changed. A station can have different class of service groups
for the day and night.
If the Autom. COS Changeover flag is set, a profile is assigned to a station instead of a COS
group. Every profile has a different schedule in which the class of service groups are defined
for specific time periods. The schedule can only be edited if the flag is activated.
Please note, however, that the station is still assigned a COS group for the night. The automatic
COS changeover has no effect here.

The automatic night service feature overrides the automatic COS changeover fea-
> ture. The schedule for the automatic COS changeover is only relevant during the
day.
Note that a manual activation of the code lock disables the automatic COS change-
over for the corresponding station.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-75
settings06.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Classes of service

6.6.6.3 Area: Select profile


You can select one of the 15 possible profiles here. The corresponding entries in the schedule
for that profile will then apply.

6.6.6.4 Area: Edit profile name


The selected profile can be assigned an appropriate name here such as Management, Pur-
chase or Warehouse, for example.

6.6.6.5 Schedule
Different class of service groups can be assigned to a profile for specific time periods in the
schedule. The schedule covers the entire week (Monday through Sunday) as well as special
days. Special days are public holidays or special days such as company holidays of the cus-
tomer (see Section 6.6.5, “Special days”, on page 6-74).
The schedule for a day can be split into 4 time intervals.
These intervals can be defined sequentially and without gaps, i.e., the end time of the first in-
terval may be identical to the start time of the second interval, for example.
However, an interval cannot have the same start and end times. The minimum length of an in-
terval is one minute.
Only one time zone is supported by the system. Remote user groups who are working in differ-
ent time zones are automatically switched over to the system time.

Editing the schedule with the left mouse button:


You can select any field in the schedule by clicking in it with the left mouse button. When you
then click on one of the Board1 to Board15 buttons to the right of the schedule, the appropriate
class of service group is assigned to this field.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-76 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings06.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Classes of service

6.6.6.6 Context menu


The context menu is activated via the right mouse button:

Copy Existing time frames - even over multiple days - can be marked and
Paste then copied. To do this, simply mark the desired area and select Copy
from the context menu. The copied area can then be inserted (past-
ed) at the current position by using the Paste function. Instead of the
context menu, you can also use the standard keyboard shortcuts of
Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V to copy and paste, respectively.
Delete The marked areas are deleted.

Set resolution Defining the time resolution (1, 15, 30 or 60 minutes).


If the selected resolution is too low, the entry will not be visible and
will be shown with an "*" prepended to the COS group (e.g.
"*Board4"). You can display the complete contents by double-clicking
on the field.

Properties This function can only be called when exactly one field has been se-
lected. The Properties dialog box opens:
– COS group: selection from class of service groups
1 through 15
– Start: The start time can be changed on a minute basis.
– End: The end time can be changed on a minute basis.
If multiple fields were selected, the Properties function will be disa-
bled.
Double-clicking on a field has the same effect as calling the Proper-
ties function via the context menu.

See also
– Section 6.6.1, “Station”, on page 6-66
– Section 6.6.2, “Day or Night”, on page 6-67
– Section 6.6.4, “Autom. night service”, on page 6-72
– Section 6.6.5, “Special days”, on page 6-74

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-77
settings07.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | System Parameters

6Settings Menu

6.7 Settings | System Parameters

Settings | System Parameters

All system-wide parameters are configured via Settings | System Parameters.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Miscellaneous
● Intercept / Attendant
● Speed dialing system
● Texts
● Daylight saving time/DISA

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-78 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings07.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | System Parameters

6.7.1 Miscellaneous

Settings | System Parameters | Miscellaneous

The menu option Miscellaneous can be used to configure parameters for key clicks, the sys-
tem ID for Cordless/CMI data and port assignments for call detail recording.

6.7.1.1 Area: Key click

Volume
The tones that sound when telephone keys are pressed (key beeps for system telephones) can
be turned on or off here. You can also control the volume.

6.7.1.2 Area: System name


On system telephones, the system branding HiPath appears on the display. This text can be
changed here if required.

6.7.1.3 Area: Hotline


The Hotline feature allows you to program one hotline number(s). For stations which are pro-
grammed with a particular index, an internal or an external number is automatically dialed when
the handset is lifted.

In order for this feature to work, the Hotline function must be set up for the selected
7 station(s) under Station view: Activated features.

6.7.1.4 Area: Port assignment


Which applications are supported on which V.24 interfaces can be configured using Port as-
signment.
In order to make the connection of a call detail printer or a call detail PC more flexible, the output
can be made to a TP-AP12 adapter in addition to the V.24 ports. This adapter is operated as a
bay option on system telephones. This makes it possible to output the charges to any UP0/E
port with a TA-API2 adapter. Only one adapter per call detail output is supported in the com-
munication system.
As of Hicom 150 H V1.0 (Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 3.0):
The call charges can be output via LAN in three different modes.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-79
settings07.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | System Parameters

Call Detail Recording Central (CDRC)


The parameters in this area are used for configuring the applications to be supported at the
various V.24 (RS-232) interfaces. In the USA, there are a limited number of call charge record-
ing features for which application interface parameters must be set.

Output format
The selection activates CDR and directs the call data to the appropriate port type. The following
options are possible:
– V.24 port (RS-232)
– UPN port
– none

V.24 port
In this field you specify which V.24 interface should be used for the CDR system output. You
don’t need to set this specification unless you selected V.24 as the Output format.

UPN port
In this field, you specify which system telephone should be used for the output of call detail re-
cording. You don’t need to set this specification unless you selected UPN as the Output for-
mat.

Attendant P
In this field, you specify which system telephone should be used for the output of call detail re-
cording. No setting needs to be made here unless Attendant P was selected as the Output for-
mat.

Call charges per station (not in the USA)


Charges that accumulate at a station are output to the port that is set up.

Call charges per trunk (not in the USA)


Charges that accumulate on the trunk are output to the port that is set up.

Customer Database Printout


This setting determines the port to which the printer is attached. Here you specify which V.24
interface should be used. This is the printer that will be used if you have elected to have the
database printout automatically after remote administration.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-80 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings07.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | System Parameters

See also:
– Section 6.7, “Settings | System Parameters”, on page 6-78

Important: If "Simplified dialing" (Prime Line) to the central office is activated, then
> LCR ( Least Cost Routing) is not available. These features are not mutually compat-
ible.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-81
settings07.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | System Parameters

6.7.2 Intercept / Attendant

Settings | System Parameters | Intercept / Attendant

The attendant is configured via Intercept / Attendant. When an incoming call cannot be com-
pleted, either because the number is incorrect or because the called party does not answer, the
call is forwarded in accordance with the criteria established in the Call Management (see Set-
tings | Incoming calls). The call is then diverted to the intercept position.

6.7.2.1 Area: Intercept position


The call number of the intercept position is defined here. The intercept position can be a single
station or group. A UCD group may not be selected as an intercept position. The handling of
the call forwarding occurs via Settings | Incoming calls. Then the intercept is made to the inter-
cept position.
On S0-lines, an evaluation takes place only when no day/night intercept position has been set
up.
As of Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 2.0, default key assignments are automatically given for the in-
tercept places (both day and night) that are defined here. This happens only when the intercept
position is a telephone, not when it’s a group. In the latter case, the same functionality can be
achieved by defining the telephone as an intercept position for a short time. The default key as-
signment has also the Number of calls key. This can be assigned to only 6 telephones. If the
limit has been reached, no more default key assignments are made. The assigned default keys
are not cancelled when a device is no longer defined as an intercept position.

Day, Night
The intercept position can be defined separately for Day and Night. In addition, it is also pos-
sible to enter any destination when activating the night service (variable night service).

6.7.2.2 Area: Central intercept position (not in the USA)


This is a European feature that is not in use in the United States.
It is possible to define a central intercept position. The central intercept position defines the
(common) intercept position for QSIG- and CorNet networked communication systems. It is
necessary to add a trunk group index to the call number first. Note that when the digit repetition
between the trunk group index and the call number is active, a valid seizure code should be
inserted for the trunk group selected.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-82 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings07.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | System Parameters

A central attendant console can be programmed for CorNet-N and CorNet-NQ using
> LCR. However, no intercept to this attendant console occurs.

6.7.2.3 Area: Intercept to intercept position


Six different intercept conditions exist. You can choose which of these criteria should be active.
You can select any number of criteria.

On RNA
When on RNA (Ring No Answer) is activated, the call follows the defined procedure (see Set-
tings | Incoming calls). If the end of the table is reached and does not answer, the system
checks to see whether or not intercept after timeout applies. In this case, the intercept position
is called after the number of rings specified under Call forwarding.
A call is not intercepted from a hunt group. The call is forwarded again to the first hunt group
station and continues to remain in the hunt group.

On Busy
If a line is on Busy, the system first checks to see whether or not a waiting call can be signaled.
If it is not possible to signal a waiting call (call waiting rejection or intercept criterion), then the
call follows the Call Management procedure (see Settings | Incoming calls).
If the call cannot be signaled at any station, the system checks to see whether intercept or
clear-down applies (B signal to CO). If an analog telephone with call waiting rejection is busy,
the call is cleared down, regardless of trunk type. In the case of DTMF direct inward dial and
MSI, the call is always intercepted.

On Invalid
If this flag is on, when a wrong number is dialed, the system checks to see whether intercept
or clear-down applies. In the case of DTMF direct dial, the call is always intercepted.

On Incomplete
If the station number dialed is incomplete, the intercept position is called at the end of the time.

On Unanswered Recall
If an external call is not picked up by the B subscriber after the A subscriber implements Trans-
fer before answering to the B subscriber, and the call is still not picked up after a recall to the A
subscriber is implemented, the intercept position is called after a defined period.
If this flag is not set, the call is cleared down after the defined period.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-83
settings07.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | System Parameters

On More Than Two Calls to P.O.T. (France only)


This feature is available only in France.
If call waiting is signaled during an ongoing call with an analog telephone, any further call is
rejected.

6.7.2.4 Area: Codelock intercept


If the telephone lock for a station is active and a trunk group code is dialed from that station,
the call is immediately forwarded to the intercept destination entered here. This means that if a
user dials a number that is not authorized, the call will be signaled on the station number as-
signed here. The Codelock intercept function is set individually for each station via Station
view: Flags.

6.7.2.5 Area: Attendant code


The intercept defined under system parameters can be reached using both the internal exten-
sion number or the DID number and the console code (internal and external calls).

Call Number Internal


This is the number used by internal devices to reach the Intercept position.
After changing the internal call number of the attendant and transferring the CDB, a download
to the IVM is triggered automatically.

Call Number External


This is the number used by DID or network (CorNet-N or CorNet-NQ) to reach the Intercept
position.

6.7.2.6 Area: Attendant


There are several parameters regarding the attendant.

Queued Calls
In the Queued Calls field, you define the maximum number of calls that can wait in the Atten-
dant queue. If the number of stations waiting in the queue of the attendant reaches this numer-
ical value, the calls are forwarded to a Configurable overflow destination.

Wait Time
Here you enter the number of seconds that a call can wait in the queue. When calls exceed this
time, they are diverted to Call forwarding defined via the Call Management (see Settings | In-
coming calls).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-84 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings07.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | System Parameters

Speed Extending
If this flag is set, the attendant can transfer the call to another party by entering the station num-
ber for that party. This speed call transfer can only be used when the system flag DTMF auto-
matic is deactivated.

Extend undialed lines (up to Release 1.0)


If the ’extend undialed lines’ flag is set, an undialed trunk can be transferred to a subscriber via
the local attendant console (AC) so that this subscriber is able to conduct an external call.
The subscriber to whom an undialed trunk is transferred also receives the toll restriction of the
attendant console for this call. This means:
1. If, for example, the attendant console has unrestricted local area access, then this ac-
cess is also assigned to the subscriber to whom a trunk is transferred.
2. If a trunk is transferred to a subscriber, this transferred trunk is valid for only one dialing
operation.
The feature can be used from the local attendant console (not for the entire network) or from
any attendant console, from an attendant console group, or from the night station.

Extend undialed lines (as of Release 2.2)


An authorized subscriber (attendant console AC) can transfer an undialed trunk to an internal
subscriber who does not have sufficient direct trunk access so that this subscriber can conduct
exactly one external call.
After the trunk is transferred to the subscriber without sufficient direct trunk access, toll restric-
tion takes place based on an additional direct trunk access for transferred trunks. The outgoing
external call is allowed only if this additional direct trunk access is sufficient, for example, if the
subscriber dials a valid number according to the denied or allowed list for transferred trunks.
The subscriber must dial the seizure code on a transferred trunk.
A CO call privilege can be configured in the communication system for each trunk group via a
reference subscriber. The default reference subscriber is the first logical subscriber port or the
attendant console. The default setting is set to unrestricted trunk access for all trunk groups.

6.7.2.7 Area: Other criteria


Call Waiting on Busy
This flag activates the Call Waiting feature for all stations in the communication system. The
following are two examples of how the call waiting feature operates (see also Station view:
Flags).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-85
settings07.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | System Parameters

Example 1:
When Call waiting on busy is activated, an external caller (A) hears the ring tone when calling
the busy station (B). Station B is notified by a display message that a call is waiting and hears
the call waiting tone on the voice channel. Station B can now answer the waiting call using the
Accept call waiting function. This action automatically places the existing call on exclusive
hold.

Example 2:
If the station is busy and intercept on busy is active, the caller will be intercepted at the atten-
dant which can then call the destination station and signal call waiting in order to switch the call.
This only works if the destination station has not activated Call waiting rejection.

Call waiting only for intercept


This flag is only relevant for CorNet networked systems.
● If the flag is set, call waiting is only allowed when an attendant console (system A) calls
station B (system B). All other stations of system A cannot reach system B via call waiting.
For the stations in System B, the condition for call waiting rejection (see Station view:
Flags) applies to the respective stations.
● If the flag is not set, all calls to busy stations in another system are switched through via
call waiting, provided the station has not turned on the call waiting rejection option.
This flag must be set if you want to place the calling intercept on hold immediately and enable
call waiting when a station is busy. If this flag is not set, the intercept receives the busy signal
and is only placed on hold after a few seconds.

Intercept with serial FWD (Call forwarding)


It is not possible to chain calls for forwarding; an attempt to initiate this procedure is rejected on
activation. For example, if a station has activated external call forwarding and the call destina-
tion has also forwarded its calls, you have a chained calls situation. This is not allowed by the
communication system. If this flag is turned on, these calls are intercepted. As of Hicom 150 E
Office Rel. 2.2 (Version 159; SMR-J), this flag ihas been deleted. A chain of call forwarding in-
stances is now possible.

See also:
– Section 4.2.1, “Station view: Flags”, on page 4-5
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50
– Section 6.5.2, “Call forwarding”, on page 6-52
– Section 6.7, “Settings | System Parameters”, on page 6-78

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-86 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings07.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | System Parameters

6.7.3 Speed dialing system

Settings | System Parameters | Speed dialing system

The Speed dialing system allows you to program telephone numbers which can then be
speed-dialed from all terminals in the communication system.
The speed dialing destinations can be both station-individual speed dialing numbers (SDI) as
well as speed dialing system destinations (SDS). These call numbers are not subject to toll re-
striction and can be dialed from every extension. If the speed dial number authorization is re-
stricted via LCR, the number cannot be dialed.
Some users program this feature to execute additional functions. For example, it is possible to
program a DTMF switchover and a dial pause by entering the following key codes within the
speed dialing number:
– # = DTMF switchover
– P = Dial pause (Redial key).
Example:
dialable number (ext. number) # P + DTMF digits = 0123456#P123

6.7.3.1 Speed Dialing System Destinations table


This table is used to enter the call number to be dialed by the communication system when a
speed dial number is entered and the name associated with that call number. Note that both
the speed dialing number and the call number must be specified for the speed dialing destina-
tion to be valid. A name can also be specified (optional).

Speed-dialing column
The number that you enter here is also called the Speed Dialing Index. This is the number that
the station will dial. The speed dialing index numbers must be three-digits, so leading zeros are
used when necessary. These numbers do not have to match the numbers in the left-most col-
umn.
Each speed dial number can only be assigned once. The number of destinations which have
already been configured and those still available is displayed at the bottom of the status bar.

Call number column


In this column, you enter the call number of the desired destination. These telephone numbers
(destinations) can contain a maximum of up to thirty-two digits. All entries must begin with the
digit 9 or another route or line code (e.g., 81 or 801).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-87
settings07.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | System Parameters

When the LCR feature is active and there are deleted trunk group codes, the entries in this col-
umn are not subject to digit analysis.

The call number is always entered with seizure and/or route codes.
>
"Automatic suffix dialing" can be achieved by entering the character ’-’. This means that a de-
cision is made when configuring the SDS whether only the configured call number is sent or
whether the option of adding a suffix manually or automatically exists. The automatic suffix can
also comprise multiple digits. A call number can include a maximum of one '-'. A '-' after a '#' is
not allowed.
Example for ISD entries:
– entered number to send: 7220
– Manual and automatic suffix: 722-0
If the subscriber does not manually dial a DID thereafter, the digit 0 is automatically
dialed after 4 seconds.
With the system configuration "LCR with Dial rule and Block dialing", the existing block dialing
timer (LCR: Timer for simulated end of dial) is used.. In this case, the timer is set to 5 seconds.

Name column
Names entered in this column are saved in the internal phone book and are displayed on dialing
the associated speed-dialing destination. Up to sixteen characters can be accepted.

6.7.3.2 Area: Status


Seized SDS, Available SDS
Depending on the expansion level of the communication system, the number of speed dialing
destinations available in each case will differ. Seized SDS therefore shows the total number of
all entered speed dialing destinations, and Available SDS shows the total number of destina-
tions still available.

6.7.3.3 Importing and exporting entries into and from the telephone directory
The following functions are available to import/export telephone directory entries from or to a
CDB in addition to the usual Copy and Paste functions

Assign Indexes... button


The Assign Indexes... button can be used to automatically number the entered speed-dial
destinations.
Clicking the Assign Indexes... button opens a dialog box with the following parameters:

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-88 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings07.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | System Parameters

– Reassign all indexes and Assign free indexes (default value). When you click on
one of these two options, the dialog box closes, and the indexes are assigned to the
telephone book entries.
– Start Index input files (default value: first unused index). You can specify the index at
which the assignment should begin here.
The indexes are assigned in the order that is visible in the table and depend on the sorting al-
gorithm being used.

Import... button
Clicking the Import ... button opens a dialog box in which the path and file name of the file to
be imported must be specified. The default path is C:\Documents and Settings\<User>\Ap-
plication Data\Siemens\Manager E, where <User> stands for the user name with which the
user has logged on at the PC. The default file name is „kwz.csv“.
In addition, a further input field in which the number of the route (empty by default) can be en-
tered is displayed. This number is automatically prepended to every number of the imported
list. Semi-colons, commas, and tabs are allowed as delimiters. Multiple delimiters in sequence
are not interpreted as delimiters, but represent an empty field. The "Import" function is then ex-
ecuted with empty fields. The selected fields are not relevant.
The "Import" and "Paste" functions are subject to the following restrictions:
– the index must lie between 0 and 999. Invalid and duplicate indexes are ignored. Cor-
rections can be made later via the Assign Indexes... button.
– The call numbers can have a maximum length of 32 characters (including special char-
acters and the trunk seizure code). Longer numbers are truncated.
– The permitted characters in the call number are: 0-9, P, # and "-"; all others characters
are deleted.
– Call numbers that are invalid based on the rules above are deleted. Invalid means that
they cannot be entered manually.
– The names can have a maximum length of 16 characters. Longer names are truncat-
ed.
– Names that are invalid (i.e., cannot be entered manually) are deleted.
– If the Import list contains too many entries, the extra entries at the end are skipped.

Export... button
Clicking the Export ... button opens a dialog box in which the path and file name of the file to
be exported must be specified. The default path is C:\Documents and Settings\<User>\Ap-
plication Data\Siemens\Manager E, where <User> stands for the user name with which the
user has logged on at the PC. The default file name is „kwz.csv“.
A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-89
settings07.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | System Parameters

The fixed delimiter ";" (semi-colon) is used. Tabulators can be used via the Copy/Paste function.
The Export function always exports all the data.

6.7.3.4 Area: Merge speed

All database equal button


This button is used to provide all speed dialing system lists in all communication systems in a
networked system with uniform speed dialing destinations.
In a networked system, or if multiple CDBs are loaded, the current speed dialing destinations
of the CDB being displayed CDB are copied to all other CDBs.
The maximum number of destinations provided depends on the communication systems used
in the networked system and is equal to the number provided by the smallest communication
system.
If the button is grayed out, this means that the networked communication systems support a
different number of speed dial destinations (e.g., a Pro supports 1000 speed dial destinations,
but a Point supports only 300). Please note, however, that If speed dial destinations are entered
in the Point, it is possible to match them against the Pro.

See also
– Section 6.7, “Settings | System Parameters”, on page 6-78

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-90 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings07.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | System Parameters

6.7.4 Texts

Settings | System Parameters | Texts

The texts of the text messages can be edited via Texts.


Two types of text messages are supported:
– Info texts (notifications), which can be sent from one station to another
– Answer texts, which can be sent to callers when the extension being called does not
answer

6.7.4.1 Area: Reset, to default values


Here you can reset the messages and answer texts to the predefined values for a given lan-
guage. A reset occurs by selecting a language from the drop-down list box.

6.7.4.2 Area: Info texts


Information texts are short messages that one station can send to another. The communication
system supplies ten standard Info texts. Each of these standard texts can be overwritten. There
are only ten possible messages available at any time. Informational texts can contain up to
twenty-four alpha or numeric characters.
Users access this information texts via the Send Message? menu item on their system tele-
phones. Stations with which have an alphanumeric keypad also have the option of creating their
own messages; however, they can not change these default messages.

6.7.4.3 Area: Answer texts


Answer texts are short messages that users can arrange to have callers receive in their ab-
sence. Ten standard texts are available. Each of these standard texts can be overwritten. An-
swer texts can contain up to twenty-four alphanumeric characters.
Stations with which have an alphanumeric keypad also have the option of creating their own
messages; however, they can not change these default messages. For many situations, users
will only need to add individual information to the existing messages.
Texts with a colon give the station the opportunity to complete the message by adding a number
or a date. Users access these answer texts via the Advisory Message On? menu item on their
system telephones.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-91
settings07.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | System Parameters

See also
– Section 6.7, “Settings | System Parameters”, on page 6-78

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-92 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings07.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | System Parameters

6.7.5 Daylight saving time/DISA

Settings | System Parameters | Daylight saving time/DISA

The date and time for the switchover to Daylight saving time can be defined in this dialog. The
day and month when daylight saving time begins and ends is defined for each year. The com-
munication system switchover occurs between 02.00 am and 03.00 am in both cases.

6.7.5.1 Area: Set daylight saving time dates

Starting Year
The communication system allows you to define the switchover date for a ten-year period. The
starting year determines when this period begins.

If there is no daylight saving time in your country and the current year was set as the
7 starting year, the communications system miscalculates the time. To solve this prob-
lem enter a starting year that does not match the current year and is in the distant
future, e.g. 2050.

Start, End, Year columns


The table contains the corresponding start (last Sunday in March; in the US first Sunday in
April) and end information (last Sunday in October) for the years 1990 through to 2079.

The start information usually entered to this table (last Sunday in March) does not
7 apply to the US. The start date must be set to the first Sunday in April in this case.
Otherwise the switchover to daylight saving time in the communication system will
be implemented a week early.

See also:
– Section 4.2.1, “Station view: Flags”, on page 4-5
– Section 6.7, “Settings | System Parameters”, on page 6-78

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-93
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6Settings Menu

6.8 Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Settings | Auxiliary equipment allows you to configure system ports (trunks) to support a
wide range of auxiliary equipment (modules).

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Ext. connection
● Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)
– IVM | Parameter/Mailbox Parameters
– IVM | Parameter/COS
– IVM | Additional Settings/General
– IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant
– IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar
– IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list
– IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox
● EVM (Entry Voice Mail)
– EVM | Additional settings/General
– EVM | Additional settings / Automatic attendant:

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-94 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.1 Ext. connection

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | Ext. connection

Ext. connection can be used to set up stations for:


– a maximum of four entrance telephone relays

Note that for an a/b port of the entrance telephone, all station flags must be first de-
> leted, and the station type must be configured. This step must be completed before
an entrance telephone can be configured.

6.8.1.1 Selection table


All stations in the communication system are listed in the Selection list by call number and
name.
The setup is implemented by selecting the extension from the list and dragging it to the desired
position (External MOH or Door relay). To delete an entry, select the entry and drag and drop
it onto the Recycle Bin.

6.8.1.2 Area: Door relay


Four entrance telephones/door openers can be configured in this table. To configure a station
for an external MOH device, you drag that station from the Selection list to the Station or Des-
tination field in the External MOH area.
You can also set up to three flags (Opener, DTMF and FWD).

Station, Destination columns


The Station port type must be P.O.T or No Port. A station number or a group number can be
specified as the Destination at which a special ring is signaled when the doorbell button is
pressed. The call is signaled in accordance with the call forwarding algorithms defined in Set-
tings | Incoming calls.

Opener
The door opening system is set up via an analog interface with this configuration. The relevant
TFE adapter box must be connected to the entrance telephone for this purpose.

The TFE adapter box is not available in the USA.


>
A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-95
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency)


This flag defines whether the door opening system can be activated remotely with a DTMF
transmitter.

FWD (Call Forwarding)


This option must be activated if the doorbell ring should follow destination external call forward-
ing and if call forwarding is to be signaled at the external destination. Internal call forwarding is
always followed, regardless of this option.

See also
– Section 6.2.1, “Subscriber”, on page 6-9
– Section 6.5, “Settings | Incoming calls”, on page 6-50
– Section 6.8, “Settings | Auxiliary equipment”, on page 6-94

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-96 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.2 Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | Integrated Voice Mail (IVM)

IVM is started with 8 or 24 B-channels by default.


The parameters and maintenance settings needed for IVM can be read out and administered
with the HiPath 3000 Manager.
IVM is only available if an IVM card is plugged into the communication system.
The start-up of the IVM ports is analogous to the start-up of a digital station port. In addition,
the station flags are used to set the station port type to Phonemail (5-digit call number).
In the ISDN port flags, the Layer 3 CHI format is set by default to interface type: other interface,
and the call reference length is set to 2.
When configuring a Groups/hunt groups, note that in order to support IVM cards with up to 24
channels, the first group must be used, since the corresponding number of ports is only sup-
ported for the first group. Furthermore, 24 channels are only possible if the type of the group is
set to cyclic or linear. If a cyclic or linear group with 24 channels was created and if this group
is later reconfigured as a normal group, then all channels in the group will be deleted.

Caution
7 When using an IVM, the ports of the EVM for voice mail usage must be decomis-
sioned (see Section 6.8.11, “EVM (Entry Voice Mail)”, on page 6-123 for details).

6.8.2.1 Mailboxes table


All mailboxes are shown in the table. Every mailbox must be uniquely identified via the index
(=row header).

Column Type Default value Range


Mailbox ID Read only Consecutive number 1-500

Mailbox call no.


The call numbers of the individual mailboxes are entered and assigned to the corresponding
index here.

Column Type Default value Range


Mailbox call number Edit control - 1–8 places

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-97
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Name
The Name belonging to the mailbox is entered here. It can be a person’s name, the name of a
department or an other suitable entry. The name can contain a maximum of 16 characters. Only
uppercase and lowercase letters from A-Z, digits, commas, periods and blanks may be used.
The station for which a mailbox should be configured can be copied over via the Add station
mailbox data button from the station dialog or from an Excel table into the mailbox dialog using
the Copy and Paste technique.

Column Type Default value Range


Mailbox name Edit control - ASCII

COS
A defined COS class (COS 1 through COS 17) can be assigned per mailbox, or the IVM | Pa-
rameter/Mailbox Parameters dialog can be used to freely assign individual COS bits to a mail-
box. Up to 254 different combinations (Type 1 to Type 254) are possible as new COS classes.
These 17 fixed and 254 free COS combinations can be assigned to mailboxes via the COS
drop-down list. All further combinations are just identified as “user-defined” and cannot be as-
signed by using the COS drop-down list.

Column Type Default value Range


Mailbox COS Selection box COS 4 COS 1 to COS 17
Type 1 to type 254
(user defined)

Param
The Param column in this dialog functions exactly as in the subscriber dialog. If it is selected
with a double-click, the submenu IVM Parameter opens with the tab:

Tabs
– IVM | Parameter/Mailbox Parameters
– IVM | Parameter/COS

As in the station dialog, the modified settings can be stored temporarily as a template and cop-
ied to additional mailboxes. The template is identified by ”**” in the Parameter column.

Name selection
You can define here whether or not name selection is to be possible for a particular station. Re-
quirements: name selection must be allowed in general (see IVM | Additional Settings/General)
and the station must have a recorded name.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-98 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.2.2 Buttons

Additional settings
Using this button, you can reach Additional settings for setting the IVM via tabs.

Tabs
– IVM | Additional Settings/General
– IVM | Additional settings/Advanced
– IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant
– IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar
– IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list
– IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox

Add station mailbox data


So long as no entries have been made in the table, the stations that are active or have been
provided with a name can be taken over in this dialog via Subscriber.
After the values are transferred, the function of the button changes to Apply template settings.
On pressing this button, the temporarily stored settings of the mailbox that is identified with a
”**” in the table are copied to one or more other mailboxes.

Check
With Check, the mailbox call numbers are checked for call number band overlap and corre-
sponding warnings are displayed.
The IVM settings are checked for consistency either manually with Check, or automatically with
Apply. In this process, the following errors are checked:
– Two mailboxes have the same call number or overlap one another in their call numbers
(e.g., ”123” and ”1234”).
– The call number of a mailbox is longer than allowed (see the Max. mailbox no. length
parameter in IVM | Additional Settings/General).
In addition, warnings are issued with the following actions:
– A mailbox that was present in the source data record was deleted.
The user must confirm this action since in this case, all parameters belonging to this
mailbox are reset to the default values; the mailbox itself is deleted from the IVM and
thereby all messages, greetings, etc. belonging to this mailbox are also deleted.
The following actions are checked during input. In the status bar, an appropriate warning results
immediately after the input.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-99
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

– The COS of a mailbox was decreased.


The user must confirm this action since in this case, all parameters that belong to the
features that are now no longer accessible for this mailbox are reset to the default val-
ues.
– A mailbox call number is assigned repeatedly.

See also:
– Section 6.8.3, “IVM | Parameter/Mailbox Parameters”, on page 6-101
– Section 6.8.4, “IVM | Parameter/COS”, on page 6-104
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109
– Section 6.8.7, “IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant”, on page 6-116
– Section 6.8.8, “IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar”, on page 6-118
– Section 6.8.9, “IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list”, on page 6-120
– Section 6.8.10, “IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox”, on page 6-121
– Section 6.8.11, “EVM (Entry Voice Mail)”, on page 6-123

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-100 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.3 IVM | Parameter/Mailbox Parameters

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | IVM | Parameters

The Mailbox parameter is used to copy certain parameters to the Mailboxes table, depending
on the selected COS parameter (see Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is
plugged-in)).
To access the dialog, double-click in the column Param on the Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only
if an IVM card is plugged-in) tab.

6.8.3.1 Area: Mailbox

Number or Index
The index or call number for the selected mailbox is shown here. If the mailbox has not been
assigned a call number as yet, the index is shown.

Name
The name of the selected mailbox.

Use as template
The settings carried out for this mailbox can be temporarily stored and then transferred to one
or more mailboxes using the template function. In connection with the button Apply template
settings (see Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)), the same mailbox
parameters can then be configured without having to set up the individual features.

Previous, Next
Shows the mailbox with the index value incremented or decremented by one.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-101
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.3.2 Additional Parameters


Depending on which COS parameters are selected in the Mailboxes table (see Integrated Voice
Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)), additional parameters are displayed.

Information on the mailbox The Information on the mailbox parameter is set for each
mailbox with the COS 1. An activated option identifies the
mailbox as an information mailbox and allows the caller to
navigate within the greeting or to listen to it repeatedly.
Automatic hang up after an- If a mailbox has been set up as an Information mailbox, the
nouncement automatic hook on after announcement option can be used
to specify whether the mailbox should hang up independently
after it is played back once.
Language The user may choose between languages 1, 2 or 3. By default,
language 1 is selected.
The language involved can be determined via Maintenance |
IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)
Fax intercept For each mailbox that has set the corresponding COS bit Fax
intercept, the Fax number at which incoming faxes are to be
intercepted can be entered here.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-102 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Greeting control Day/night system


In COS 6, the connected greeting can be controlled using the
IVM calendar (not available in Rel. 1.0) or the night service
status of the communication system.
If Day/night system is selected, the day and night greeting
(greeting 1 or 2) are automatically connected by the IVM, de-
pending on the night service status of the communication sys-
tem.

manual
If manual is selected, the 4 possible greetings are activated
manually by the user.

Type of call
If Type of call is selected, a distinction is made between inter-
nal and external calls. Greetings 1 and 2 of the IVM are then
converted to the internal and external greeting.
If the Greeting selection flag is selected in COS 17 for MOH,
Type of call is deactivated.

IVM calendar
A calendar function can be added to all announcement mail-
boxes. If the Greeting selection flag is selected in COS 17,
IVM calendar can be selected and activated.

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.4, “IVM | Parameter/COS”, on page 6-104

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-103
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.4 IVM | Parameter/COS

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | IVM | Parameter

For each mailbox, COS can be used to create the individual variants of COS classes that de-
viate from the standard.
To access the dialog, double-click in the column Param on the Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only
if an IVM card is plugged-in) tab.

6.8.4.1 Area: Mailbox

Number or Index
The index or call number for the selected mailbox is shown here. If the mailbox has not been
assigned a call number as yet, the index is shown.

Name
The name of the selected mailbox.

Use as template
The settings carried out for this mailbox can be temporarily stored and then transferred to one
or more mailboxes using the template function. In connection with the button Apply template
settings (see Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)), the same mailbox
parameters can then be configured without having to set up the individual features.

Previous, Next
Shows the mailbox with the index value incremented or decremented by one.

6.8.4.2 Table COS, COS, Status


Mailbox variant consisting of the COS features. Every individual feature can be released in the
Status column.

Info/minimum mailbox
Setting this COS bit allows you to set up this mailbox as an info mailbox. This COS bit cannot
be set at the same time as the Auto Attendant Mailbox COS bit. The Number of Greetings
setting must be set to 1. If not, corrections will be made when setting this COS bit.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-104 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Auto Attendant Mailbox


Specifies whether this feature is activated for the mailbox. This COS bit cannot be set at the
same time as the Info/Minimum Mailbox COS bit.

Group mailbox
Specifies whether the mailbox is a group mailbox.

Number of Greetings
This parameter specifies the number of greetings for the mailbox. The number of greetings
plays a role in the following features:
● Greeting selection
● Week plan
● Personal week plan

Recording and sending message


Specifies whether the mailbox owner may record a message in his or her own message block
and send it to another (other) mailbox(es). As a recipient, you may choose system-wide dis-
tribution list and broadcast in addition to Mailbox as long as the mailbox has the appropriate
class of service.

Send messages
Specifies whether the mailbox owner can forward the last message heard on to another mail-
box. When doing so, he or she can record a commentary that is attached to the message. As
a recipient, you may choose system-wide distribution list and broadcast in addition to mail-
box, if the mailbox has the appropriate class of service.

Callback to message originator


Specifies whether the mailbox owner can call the person who left the message back if his or
her call number was transferred. In this case, the callback is started using a key combination
("*8 or "70", depending on the User interface switchover to Xpressions V3 interface setting).

Save messages
Specifies whether this mailbox supports message saving.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-105
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Skip to next TUI function


Specifies whether it is possible to skip all of the messages in this mailbox and go straight to the
mailbox administrator. Skipping to the next TUI function is initiated using the key combination
"*" / "79" in the User interface switchover to Xpressions V3 interface.

Private message
Specifies whether this feature is activated for the mailbox.

Greeting selection
Specifies whether the mailbox has greeting control.

Message call
Specifies whether this feature is activated for the mailbox.

Substitute function
Specifies whether this feature is activated for the mailbox.

FAX number
Specifies whether the mailbox can set its own fax intercept.

Switch mailbox language


Specifies whether the user language for this mailbox can be selected or changed.

Personal mailbox user name


Specifies whether the mailbox has a user name.

Broadcast
This COS bit is used to grant a mailbox authorization to send broadcast messages. Broadcast
is a special case when sending voice messages. If a station is authorized to send broadcast
messages, this will be indicated as an optional destination on the TUI. When the mailbox has
received a broadcast message, an MWI notification is sent automatically.

System-wide distribution list


Specifies whether messages sent from this mailbox from distribution lists are offered as a des-
tination.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-106 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Speed dial destinations for 4 segments of the day


If this COS bit is set in an auto attendant mailbox, this mailbox can be assigned speed dial
destinations that depend on the IVM calendar.

Disable direct dialing


If this COS bit is set, no further call numbers may be dialed in an auto attendant mailbox . To
connect further, the caller must use preset speed dial destinations.

Agile Mailbox Attendant


By setting the Agile Support COS bit, a switchboard procedure will be carried out with another
timing (except with fax tone recognition).

E-mail notification
Specifies whether this feature is activated for the mailbox.

No recording of greetings in the TUI


If this COS bit is set, no further greetings may be recorded in the TUI. The only way to change
the default greeting is to upload a WAV file via the HiPath Manager or WEB.

Automatic Forwarding
Specifies whether this feature is activated for the mailbox.

Mobility Mailbox
Specifies whether this feature is activated for the mailbox.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-107
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 5.8.9, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Personal week plan”, on
page 5-26
– Section 5.8.12.3, “Greetings, PC->IVM Delta”, on page 5-31
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.3, “IVM | Parameter/Mailbox Parameters”, on page 6-101
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109
– Section 6.8.8, “IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar”, on page 6-118
– Section 6.8.9, “IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list”, on page 6-120
– Section 6.8.10, “IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox”, on page 6-121

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-108 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.5 IVM | Additional Settings/General

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | IVM | Additional settings | General

The menu item General is used to make general settings that are common to all mailboxes.
To access the dialog box, double-click the Additional settings button in the Integrated Voice
Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in) tab.

6.8.5.1 "General parameters" area

Max. mailbox no. length


Here the maximum length of the mailbox number can be laid down.
Setting range: 1 to 8 places.
The default value is 3 places.

Max. message length (sec)


This is the length that is available to the caller to have a message recorded (maximum length
of the arriving message in seconds).
Setting range: 1 to 1200 seconds.
The default value is 120 seconds.

Help announce. timeout (sec)


This is the time after which the help announcement is switched on when the user calls the mail-
box and activates no other input.
Setting range: 1 to 5 seconds.
The default value is 3 seconds.

Help announce. repeats


The help announcement is repeated as often as is set here.
Setting range: 0 to 5 repetitions.
The default value is 3 repetitions.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-109
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Attempts to send message


If the user has configured a message service, the IVM tries to send a message, with the corre-
sponding number of repetitions, to the call number input.
Setting range: 1 to 255 repetitions.
The default value is 3 repetitions.

Attempt to send notification every (min)


The IVM tries to send the set number of repetitions for messages in the time input here.
Setting range: 1 minute. to 60 minutes.
The default value is 15 minutes.

It should be kept in mind that the setting of the two values (the number of attempts
> to send the message and the time to attempt to send the message) should result in
a combination that makes sense.

General fax intercept


The Fax intercept destination to which the IVM should normally send incoming faxes must be
specified here. Mailboxes with the COS 5 or 6 may have a different fax intercept destination; for
all others, the destination defined here is used.
Setting range: Valid internal Fax number
Default value: none

Message length live recording


Maximum length for voice recording (Live Call Record).
Setting range: 1 - 60 minutes
Default value: 5 minutes

Transfer behavior
This defines the transfer behavior of the IVM. The following can be selected: Blind, Ring or
Answer.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-110 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Transfer behavior Description


Blind Transfer Blind Transfer is the unmonitored attendant console. The call is
switched as quickly as possible (Transfer before answer). It is
not possible to switch to a busy destination with call waiting re-
jection. In this case, the call is sent to the mailbox of the desti-
nation station (if available) or returned back to the transferring
mailbox.
Ring Ring is the partially monitored attendant console. The call is
switched as soon as the destination is called (Transfer before
answer). If the destination station is busy and no call waiting is
possible, "Ring", in contrast to "Blind Transfer", offers the option
of either being switched again after a timeout (30 sec) or, in the
case of an AutoAttendant mailbox, dialing another destination.
Answer Answer is the fully monitored attendant console. The call is only
switched if the destination station accepts the call (Transfer af-
ter messaging). The options in cases where no switching was
possible analogous to those for "Ring". The waiting time for the
call to be accepted can be configured via a time parameter in
the range of 10 to 60 seconds (default: 20 seconds).

The default setting is Blind Transfer.

>
Regardless of this parameter, switching for a callback to the caller and for Fax calls
always occurs with Answer and Blind Transfer, respectively.

Call number length delimitation


If a call number length restriction has been activated, only call numbers up to the length of the
mailbox call number can be dialed from the IVM for outgoing calls (AutoAttendant speed dialing,
substitute call, message call). In cases where longer call numbers have been configured, no
connection is established.
The parameter is deactivated by default.

Repetitions of Announcement at AutoAttendant


The greetings in an AutoAttendant mailbox are repeated as often as defined.
Setting range: 0 - 5 repetitions.
The default value is 3.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-111
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Time until announcement of AutoAttendant


Time after which the announcement of an AutoAttendant mailbox is repeated.
Setting range: 1 - 5 seconds
The default value is 3.

Announcement before voice recording


Specifies whether the start of voice recording (Live Call Record) should be signaled with a
voice prompt or warning tone (Beep) or whether no signaling (none) should occur before the
voice recording.

6.8.5.2 "Recording quality" area


This area controls in which quality greetings and messages are to be saved. This depends on
the amount of memory space used. The following options are available:
● Memory-optimized greetings and messages (less memory space required)
● Greetings in HiQuality and memory-optimized messages (medium memory space re-
quired)
● Greetings and messages in HiQuality (more memory space required)

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-112 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.5.3 "AutoAttendant announcement behavior" area


This area determines which voice files are played for a caller by the EVM Auto Attendant (EVM:
Extended Voice Mailbox). The following checkboxes can be activated or deactivated:

Checkbox Default Announcements


VP before transfer1 deactivated ● "Please wait, you are being connected..."
VP transfer result activated One of the following announcements are played:
● "The station number does not exist."
● "The station is busy."
● "The station is not answering."
VP intercept activated One of the following announcements are played:
● Two combined announcements:
"You are being connected with the operator."
"Please wait."
● "You are being connected with the mailbox of
the station."
● "Please wait, you are being connected..."
VP before release activated One of the following announcements are played:
● "Please call later."
● "Thank you. Goodbye."
● "The mailbox number is invalid."
1 VP: Voice prompt

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.7, “IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant”, on page 6-116
– Section 6.8.8, “IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar”, on page 6-118
– Section 6.8.9, “IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list”, on page 6-120
– Section 6.8.10, “IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox”, on page 6-121

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-113
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.6 IVM | Additional settings/Advanced

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | IVM | Additional settings | Advanced

Under Advanced, you can make settings that apply to all mailboxes.
To access the dialog box, double-click the Additional settings button on the Integrated Voice
Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in) tab.

6.8.6.1 Area: General parameters

Number of remote login attempts


Here you can set the number of incorrect attempts permitted.
Setting range: 0 to 3 attempts
The default values are:
– IVM2.0: 1
– IVM3.0: 0

Number of characters in a search term


You can set the number of characters permitted in a search term here.
Setting range: 3 to 6 characters
The default value is 3 characters.

First name/surname search


You can use the drop-down list to specify whether the search should be performed according
to first name or surname.

Message info after message


Here you can define whether message information should be configured before or after the
message.

Immediate help announcement


Here you can define whether a help announcement should be played immediately when the
mailbox is accessed or after a configurable time period (in seconds).

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-114 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

High security level


This flag controls the level of IVM security (not activated: normal; activated: high); it is activated
by default. If the level of security is set to "normal", registered users are not prompted to enter
their password in order to access the Mobility main menu. The password is only requested if
the user switches to the current mailbox message block.
Together with the IVM software version, this flag also controls the security of the user password
for the mailbox:
● Up to software version HE300V.04.106E04, the user must change the mailbox password
when accessing the mailbox for the first time if the "High security level" flag is activated (ac-
tivated = high security).
● As of software version HE300V.04.108E02, the user must always change the mailbox
password when accessing the mailbox for the first time, regardless of the status of the flag.
This modification is intended to reduce call charge fraud.

See also:
– Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)
– Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)
– IVM | Additional Settings/General
– IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant
– IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar
– IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list
– IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-115
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.7 IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | IVM | Additional settings | Automatic


Attendant

The Automatic attendant can be used to configure the relevant mailbox features that provide
automatic attendant functionality (COS 5, COS 6, COS 14 and COS 15). This means that a
caller can be redirected to specific destinations (which are defined here) on dialing the digits 0
through 9. A corresponding announcement must, of course, be provided to explain these dial-
ing options. It is also possible to configure intercept destinations to which the caller will be re-
directed if he or she fails to enter a digit or enters an invalid (i.e., unassigned) digit.
To access the dialog box, double-click the Additional settings button on the Integrated Voice
Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in) tab.

Mailbox number/name
In the drop-down list box, only the relevant mailboxes with the authorizations COS 5, COS 6,
COS 14 and COS 15 are shown for selection.

Provide DTMF menu independent of call type


Here you can define whether or not a DTMF menu should be provided, regardless of call type.

Time between key depressions (sec)


You can set the period between two key depressions using the drop-down list.
Setting range: 1 to 10 seconds (0.5 second increments)
Default: 2.5 seconds

6.8.7.1 Station table


Here, all subscribers are displayed that
– are set up (active or provided with a name) and
– are not defined as phone mail ports

6.8.7.2 Configured mailboxes table


List of all configured mailboxes.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-116 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.7.3 Speed dial/Intercept destinations


Up to 10 speed-dial destinations (from 0 through 9) and two intercept destinations (day and
night) can be configured here. Callers are redirected to the intercept destinations in cases of
"no response" or "no dialing". In the COS 6, when greeting control (day/night) by the commu-
nication system is activated, the corresponding destination is selected; otherwise, only the first
intercept destination (day) is always used. The destinations themselves can be selected from
the Station and Configured mailboxes lists and dragged & dropped onto the table. The des-
tination type is automatically set to Call no. or Mailbox. If desired, you can also enter the speed-
dial destination directly. The destination type must then be set accordingly to Mailbox, Call No.
or CO (ext.). For the type CO (ext.), a trunk group (route 1) is seized by the IVM before dialing
the specified call number. Incomplete entries are not accepted. To delete speed dial destina-
tions, mark the entry in the table and drag it to the Recycle Bin.

If the call number of an additional mailbox with the function ”Automatic attendant”
> was entered as a speed dial destination, you can jump directly to this mailbox by
double-clicking in this field.

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109
– Section 6.8.8, “IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar”, on page 6-118
– Section 6.8.9, “IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list”, on page 6-120
– Section 6.8.10, “IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox”, on page 6-121

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-117
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.8 IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | IVM | Additional settings Calendar

Calendar can be used to define the work hours and pause times (break) for the switchover of
announcements.
To access the dialog box, double-click the Additional settings button on the Integrated Voice
Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in) tab.

Week plan table


For each weekday, the start and end of the work hours (day announcement) and the start and
end of the pause (pause announcement) must be entered.
A further differentiation and time-based control of announcements can be achieved by entering
the start and end times for a special announcement.
During any period outside the work and pause times, the night announcement is active.
By default, the table is filled for the weekdays from Monday through Thursday with the values
08:00-17:00 for work hours and 12:00-12:30 for the pause, and for Friday with the values 08:00-
15:00 as work hours and 12:00-12:30 as the pause.
The start and end times for the special announcement are not set by default.
On Saturday and Sunday, the night announcement is active by default.
Settable range: 00:00-23:59 hours.

Priority Time Announcement


1 Special time Special announcement
2 Length of pause Pause announcement
3 Work hours Day announcement
4 other Night announcement

Monthly overview
From this monthly overview, up to 50 days can be transferred to the Special Days table.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-118 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Special days (year) table


The start and end times for the work hours, pause times and special times must be defined for
the days in this table.
The Table is empty by default.

The following priorities apply if the times in the two tables overlap:

Priority Time Announcement


1 Special time Special announcement
2 Length of pause Pause announcement
3 Work hours Day announcement
4 other Night announcement

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 5.8.9, “Maintenance | IVM: Mailbox configuration: Personal week plan”, on
page 5-26
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109
– Section 6.8.7, “IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant”, on page 6-116
– Section 6.8.9, “IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list”, on page 6-120
– Section 6.8.10, “IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox”, on page 6-121

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-119
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.9 IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | IVM | Additional settings Central distribution


list

The Central distribution list can be used to configure up to 20 destination mailboxes or lists
for the distribution of messages in 20 lists.
To access the dialog box, double-click the Additional settings button on the Integrated Voice
Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in) tab.

Lists
In lists 1 through 20, several different selected mailboxes or lists can be stored.

Destinations
List of all configured mailboxes and lists.

Dest. in list
Selected targets of the selected list (1-20).
The destinations are selected by “dragging and dropping” them from the Destinations list. De-
letion is performed by dragging and dropping into the recycling bin.

Edit Name
This field can be used to edit the name of the central distribution list that was just selected. The
name can contain a maximum of 16 characters. Only uppercase and lowercase letters from A-
Z, digits, commas, periods and blanks may be used.
By default, the names are defined with "List 1" to "List 20".

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109
– Section 6.8.7, “IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant”, on page 6-116
– Section 6.8.8, “IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar”, on page 6-118
– Section 6.8.10, “IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox”, on page 6-121

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-120 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.10 IVM | Additional Settings/Group mailbox

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | IVM | Additional settings GroupMailbox

Group mailbox can be used to enter up to 20 group members per group mailbox with the class-
es of service COS 7 or COS 16.
To access the dialog box, double-click the Additional settings button on the Integrated Voice
Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in) tab.

Mailbox number/name
In the drop-down list, only the relevant mailboxes with the classes of service COS 7 or COS 16
and the MULAP group numbers are offered for selection.
Setting range: 1 to 8 places

Shared group mailbox


Here you can define if a mailbox is a shared group mailbox.
Mailboxes may only belong to one shared mailbox group. A "normal group" can only be iden-
tifed as "shared" if it does not contain any members that belong to another shared mailbox
group.

Stations
Here, all subscribers are displayed that
– are set up (active or provided with a name),
– are not defined as phone mail ports,
– do not have an own mailbox yet, and
– are also not a member of a group mailbox.

Members
All members of the group mailbox are shown here.
The stations may be selected by dragging and dropping (or via the New button) them from the
internal list of Stations or directly entered in the Member field. Members of a group mailbox
are deleted by dragging and dropping them into the Recycle Bin.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-121
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

See also:
– Section 5.8.3, “Maintenance | IVM (only if an IVM card is plugged in)”, on page 5-18
– Section 6.8.2, “Integrated Voice Mail (IVM) (only if an IVM card is plugged-in)”, on
page 6-97
– Section 6.8.5, “IVM | Additional Settings/General”, on page 6-109
– Section 6.8.8, “IVM | Additional Settings/Calendar”, on page 6-118
– Section 6.8.9, “IVM | Additional Settings/Central distribution list”, on page 6-120
– Section 6.8.7, “IVM | Additional settings /Automatic attendant”, on page 6-116

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-122 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.11 EVM (Entry Voice Mail)

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | EVM

The parameters and maintenance settings needed for EVM can be read out and administered
with the HiPath 3000 Manager.
EVM is only available if an EVM card is plugged into the communication system.
The start-up of the EVM ports is analogous to the start-up of a digital station port. In addition,
the station flags are used to set the station port type to Phonemail (5-digit call number).

Caution
7 When using another voice mail application such as IVM (HiPath Xpressions Com-
pact) or Phonemail, the ports of the EVM for the voice mail usage must be decomis-
sioned. To do this, the ports must be set to the extension type “Standard” and re-
moved from the hunt group of the active voice mail. In addition, the number of
mailboxes for autoconfiguration must be set to “0”. This prevents inadvertent chang-
es to the Call Management by the user.

6.8.11.1 Mailboxes table


The table shows all the mailboxes. Every mailbox must be uniquely identified via the index
(=row header). There are 24 rows (corresponding to the maximum number of EVM mailboxes).

For group mailboxes (groups and MULAP), new messages are signaled in the dis-
> play of only the first station in the group.

Mailbox call no.


The call numbers of the individual mailboxes are entered here. A mailbox is identified by means
of the call number.

If a mailbox is to be assigned to a station, the mailbox must have the same call num-
> ber as the station.

● Setting up the Common Greeting Mailbox


The phone numbers belonging to the Common Greeting Mailboxfor the EVM hunt group
containing the EVM ports are entered here.
Default: 351

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-123
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Name
The Name associated with the mailbox is entered here . The name is taken from the station
dialog (see also Subscriber). In the case of a group, the group name is displayed.
The station for which a mailbox should be configured can be taken over from the station dialog
or from an Excel table into the mailbox dialog using “Copy and Paste”.

Greeting
Use the drop-down list to select the defaults for the mailboxes. On selecting Day/night, the
greeting control occurs automatically. Greeting 1 is then played for the day service and Greet-
ing 2 for the night service.
● Greetings on activated Common Greeting Mailbox
– Common company name announcement
The first greeting from the Common Greeting Mailbox is used as a common greeting
for all (non-AA) mailboxes, e.g. "Welcome to Siemens". The mailbox greeting is then
output as a name, e.g. "John Smith".
The second greeting from the Common Greeting Mailbox is likewise a common an-
nouncement, e.g. "is currently unavailable, please leave a message".
– Name announcement
If the first greeting of the Common Greeting Mailbox is not available, the voice prompt
"Here is the mailbox of " is output. The mailbox greeting is then output as a name, e.g.
"John Smith".
If the second Common Greeting Mailbox announcement is not available - which would
make sense in this case - it is replaced by 250 ms of "silence".

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-124 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Recording, AutoAttendant
For each mailbox, you can select whether it that mailbox is to be used as a standard mailbox
(Recording) or an attendant mailbox (AutoAttendant). It is not possible to enable Recording
and AutoAttendant simultaneously. A maximum of 4 mailboxes can be configured as Atten-
dant mailboxes.
If neither Recording nor AutoAttendant is selected (Standard), a mailbox is created without
enabling the recording function. In such cases, the subscriber must enable the recording when
checking the mailbox for the first time. This ensures that no messages can be recorded before
the mailbox has been activated by the user.

When a standard mailbox is converted to an AutoAttendant mailbox, all existing


> messages of the mailbox are deleted.

Password Reset
Select this option for any mailboxes for which the associated passwords are to be reset at the
next transfer of the CDB to the communication system. The password is reset to the
value 1234.

6.8.11.2 Buttons

Additional settings
Using this button, you can reach Additional settings for setting the EVM via tabs.

Tabs
– EVM | Additional settings/General

See also:
– Section 5.8.14, “Maintenance | EVM”, on page 5-34
– Section 6.8.12, “EVM | Additional settings/General”, on page 6-126

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-125
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.12 EVM | Additional settings/General

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | EVM | Additional settingsGeneral

The General tab allows you to define the settings that are common to all mailboxes.
To access the dialog box, click the Additional settings button on the EVM (Entry Voice Mail)
tab.

6.8.12.1 Area: General parameters

Max. mailbox no. length


Here the maximum length of the mailbox number can be defined.
Setting range: 2 to 8 places
Default value: 2 or 3 places (depending on the communication system)

Maximum message length (min)


This is the length that is available to the caller to have a message recorded (maximum length
of the incoming message in minutes).
Setting range: 1 to 5 minutes
Default value: 2 minutes

General fax intercept


The Fax intercept destination to which the EVM should normally send incoming faxes must be
specified here. If no fax intercept destination is specified, the fax tone detection is also disabled.
If a fax tone detection is desired, but no forwarding is to occur, an invalid destination must be
entered here.
Setting range: Valid internal Fax number
Default value: none

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-126 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

Call number length delimitation


If a call number length restriction has ben activated, only call numbers up to the specified length
can be dialed from the EVM for outgoing calls (AutoAttendant suffix dialing and AutoAttendant
speed dialing). In cases where longer call numbers have been configured, no connection is es-
tablished.
Setting range: 1 to 30
By default, the call number length restriction corresponds to the (internal) call number length of
the mailbox, so only internal dialing is allowed.

Standard lang.
The standard language selected here is applied to the settings for all mailboxes.

If a language in which the EVM is not loaded is selected, then the language UK En-
> glish (enuk) is activated. If UK English is not loaded either, then the first language
loaded on the EVM is activate automatically.

6.8.12.2 "Recording quality" area


This area controls in which quality greetings and messages are to be saved. This depends on
the amount of memory space used. The following options are available:
● Memory-optimized greetings and messages (less memory space required)
● Greetings in HiQuality and memory-optimized messages (medium memory space re-
quired)
● Greetings and messages in HiQuality (more memory space required)

See also:
– Section 5.8.14, “Maintenance | EVM”, on page 5-34
– Section 6.8.11, “EVM (Entry Voice Mail)”, on page 6-123
– Section 6.8.13, “EVM | Additional settings / Automatic attendant:”, on page 6-128

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-127
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

6.8.13 EVM | Additional settings / Automatic attendant:

Settings | Auxiliary equipment | EVM | Additional settings/Automatic


attendant:

Automatic attendant is used to configure the corresponding features for mailboxes that were
configured as attendant mailboxes. By selecting the digits 0 to 9, a caller can be forwarded to
specific destinations defined here. These dialing options must, of course, be explained with a
corresponding announcement. It is also possible to configure intercept destinations to which
the caller will be redirected if he or she fails to enter a digit or enters an invalid (i.e., unassigned)
digit.
To access the dialog box, click theEVM (Entry Voice Mail) Additional settings button on the
tab.

Automatic Attendant Mailbox number/name


The drop-down list offers a selection of the appropriate mailboxes for which the AutoAttendant
option was selected.

Stations table
Displays all stations that are
– configured (active or provided with a name) and
– not defined as phonemail (call number, 5 digits)

Speed dial/Intercept destinations


Up to 10 speed-dial destinations (from 0 through 9) and one intercept destination can be con-
figured here for the day and night service, respectively. Switching to the intercept destinations
occurs when no digit or an invalid (i.e., unassigned) digit is pressed. If a Day/night greeting is
activated, the corresponding destination is selected; otherwise, only the first intercept destina-
tion (day) is always used.
The destinations can be selected from the Stations table and dragged & dropped onto this ta-
ble. You can also enter the destinations directly. To delete a destination, mark the entry in the
table and drag it to the Recycle Bin.

Intercept after announcem.


If this option is activated, the call is redirected to the call number specified under Intercept (e.g.,
the attendant console) immediately after the announcement.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-128 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
settings08.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Settings Menu
Settings | Auxiliary equipment

When the "intercept after announcem." flag is activated, the greeting text is played once, fol-
lowed by the intercept. No speed-dialing destination can be dialed during the announcement
of the greeting.
When the Intercept after announcem. flag is deactivated, the announcement is played and
then the EVM transfers the caller to the number specified under Intercept.(e.g. attendant con-
sole). During the announcement of the greeting, speed-dialing will also work.

no suffix-dialing
If this option is activated, the caller can only be redirected to other destinations via the speed-
dial destinations (choice of digits 0 to 9). No (multi-digit) call number can be selected by the
AutoAttendant.

See also
– Section 5.8.14, “Maintenance | EVM”, on page 5-34
– Section 6.8.11, “EVM (Entry Voice Mail)”, on page 6-123
– Section 6.8.12, “EVM | Additional settings/General”, on page 6-126

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 6-129
settings08.fm

Settings Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Settings | Auxiliary equipment

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
6-130 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu

7 System Status Menu

System-wide
Call charges
Table 7-1 System Status Menu

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-1
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


System-wide

7.1 System-wide
The System status | System-wide option contains a number of tabs, which affect the commu-
nication system status in various ways. Some of these tabs are for information purposes only,
while others allow you to make changes to the parameters displayed. The status of the com-
munication system involved here is the status at the time when the customer database is down-
loaded.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Cards
● Loadware
● System
● Flags
● Forwarding
● Line states
● System texts
● UCD Agents

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
System-wide

7.1.1 Cards

System Status | System-wide | Cards

The Cards tab offers two primary functions:


– First, it provides an overview of the System expansion hardware (HW expansion),
which allows you to view the layout of the communication system. Slot numbers and
card numbers are displayed. To facilitate repairs, replacements, and upgrades, you
can also display part code numbers for each card. Some users find it convenient to
view this tab remotely to determine whether or not a new card is required before add-
ing additional services to the communication system
– In addition, the overview provided via System expansion software (SW expansion)
can be used to set up cards in the system software (Card Config.) before they are
physically installed in the communication system.

7.1.1.1 Area: System type


Contains the possible system types.

7.1.1.2 Area: Country version


A country was selected at the time that the communication system was installed. That country
is listed here. Different features are available with different country versions.

7.1.1.3 Area: Software version


This is the release number of the operating system software. Note that this is not the system
software number.

7.1.1.4 Table: Card selection


The Card Selection list box lists all of the cards that can be used with the system and which
have not yet been plugged.

7.1.1.5 Area: Switchover to

SW expansion, HW expansion
You can switch between the System expansion hardware and System expansion software
views via the corresponding SW expansion and HW expansion buttons.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-3
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


System-wide

System expansion hardware


The System expansion hardware view shows the hardware actually installed in the commu-
nication system. This Box field displays the communication system’s card assignments.

System expansion software


The System expansion software overview allows you to view the system configuration based
on the available SW. The Software will automatically detect every card physically in the com-
munication system.

7.1.1.6 Area: Card data


When a particular card (Slot) is selected in the Box, corresponding data for this card is shown
in Card data.

Slot: Slot number for the selected card in the communication system.
Designation and The card name or number. The designation may deviate slightly for 19”
code no. cards (e.g. SLU8R is displayed as SLU8).
For the SBSCS, SBSCO, CBCP, CBCC and CBCPR control cards, the
code number (including variant and output status) is read out of the com-
munication system. For all other cards, the code number is provided by the
HiPath 3000 Manager itself. In addition, the subcards (CMS, CMA, LIM,
IMODC, MPPI) inserted for the control cards referred to are also displayed
in the form of a drop-down list.
Card data The card data type is displayed for a TST1/TMST1 module. This can be
either TMST1 analog or digital, depending on the selection made in the
Select Card list. If the Layer 1 or 2 configuration was changed in the Card
Configuration field, the standard selection must be changed to TST1/
TMST1 analog or digital modified.
There are 4 default card templates for T1: TMST1 Digital, TMST1 Analog,
TMST1 Digital mod. and TMST1 Analog mod.
These templates are changed as follows:
Template TMST1 Digital and TMST11 Analog: timer T203 = 10s,
Template TMST1 Digital mod. and TMST1 Analog mod. timer T203 = 30s.

See also
– Section 7.1, “System-wide”, on page 7-2

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
System-wide

7.1.2 Loadware

System Status | System-wide | Loadware

All Loadware versions available in the communication system can be displayed via Loadware.

See also:
– Section 7.1, “System-wide”, on page 7-2

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-5
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


System-wide

7.1.3 System

System Status | System-wide | System

System allows status information for the communication system to be displayed, for example
system-wide flags or the software version.

7.1.3.1 Area: System-wide flags


These entries shows whether FWD to the ISDN CO is activated or deactivated.
The destination call number is also displayed if FWD is activated.
The night service status is also displayed.

7.1.3.2 Area: Optional cards


Data from optional cards with a processor is displayed here (GEE12/16/50, STRB cards). An
ALUM is not displayed here.
The data serves the identification of the options and the output status.

Option slot Slot location of the option


Option type The type of the option inserted in the slot
SW code number Code number of the option card (if available).
HW ID Option card code
Option card code serves to differentiate between HW variants of an
option (e.g., 0x for GEE12/16; 0x1 for GEE50).

7.1.3.3 Table: MSN or CFW status


The Call forwarding to CO feature is organized into 3 types of call forwarding:
– CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional
This is unconditional, immediate call forwarding; all calls intended for an MSN are for-
warded directly by the carrier, regardless of their status.
– CFNR Call Forwarding No Reply
Call forwarding to CO is implemented only when the incoming call is not answered
within a given time (15 s).
– CFB Call Forwarding Busy
Call forwarding is implemented only if the selected MSN is busy.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-6 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
System-wide

All three types of call forwarding can be realized for any other external connection (ISDN net-
work, analog network, radio telephone network, global). This service is always activated for the
basic services ”telephony”, ”speech” and ” 3.1 kHz audio”.
Only one forwarding destination can be entered per MSN and forwarding type.
Call forwarding can be activated/deactivated from any telephone to which an MSN is assigned
and which has the authorization to initiate external call forwarding. The other MSN’s are not
affected by this call forwarding. If an MSN is assigned to a group, every station in the group can
activate/deactivate the call forwarding. The destination call number of the call forwarding must
be entered without trunk group code since the call forwarding is implemented in the central of-
fice.
There is a common procedure for all three types of call forwarding. In this procedure, the type
of the call forwarding, the MSN to be forwarded and the forwarding destination must be en-
tered. It is absolutely necessary to enter the MSN since a station can be assigned to several
MSN’s under group configuration. The activation of the feature can be initiated using expert
codes, menus, or key functionality.
Call forwarding can be deactivated at any time, independently of the activation.
The Call forwarding to CO for each MSN feature is limited to 10 MSN’s and is valid only for
multi-device connections.
An activated CFU is signaled by a special dial tone and a display by which the stations assigned
to the MSN.
For each MSN, the line where the call forwarding is to be activated is configured, since each
MSN is given a basic connection.
The system status displays for which MSN, on which line and to which call number, a call for-
warding to CO has been activated. In addition, the type of the call forwarding (CFU/CFNR/CFB)
is displayed.

7.1.3.4 Area: Software version


The software version and/or binder number of the communication system is displayed in this
field.
The country version is also listed.

7.1.3.5 Area: HW data


Hardware data from the communication system is displayed here.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-7
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


System-wide

Serial no. = MAC addr


The MAC address of the LAN Interface Module (LIM) is displayed here). This MAC address is
also simultaneously used as the unique serial number of the control board. This information is
available only for HiPath 3000.

See also:
– Section 7.1, “System-wide”, on page 7-2

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-8 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
System-wide

7.1.4 Flags

System Status | System-wide | Flags

The activated features of individual stations can be queried via Flags.

7.1.4.1 Table: Stations/MULAP


All stations available in the communication system are entered in the Stations/MULAP table
(also MULAPs as of Hicom 150 H V1.0/Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 3.0).

7.1.4.2 Area: Stations/MULAP, Station/MULAP flags


If a station is selected in the table Stations/MULAP, the features that were modified and en-
tered by the station are listed under Stations/MULAP flags.

7.1.4.3 Area: Mark deletions

Set, Remove
The features shown in Stations/MULAP flags can be deactivated for each station. To do this,
select the relevant stations in the table and then press the Set button (Mark deletions, Set) The
stations whose features are to be deleted at the next upload (see Transfer) are shown in the
table (indented). Mark deletions can be canceled by pressing the Remove button (Mark dele-
tions, Remove). Mark deletions cannot be set in an AllServe system.

See also:
– Section 5.8, “Transfer”, on page 5-11
– Section 7.1, “System-wide”, on page 7-2

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-9
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


System-wide

7.1.5 Forwarding

System Status | System-wide | Forwarding

Forwarding only displays station-specific (no system-specific) status information. Under Call
forwarding you can see whether the station has been forwarded to another station or is itself
a call forwarding destination. As of Hicom 150 H V1.0/Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 3.0, forwarding
for MULAPs is also displayed.

7.1.5.1 Table: Stations/MULAP


All stations available in the communication system are entered in the Stations/MULAP table
(also MULAPs as of Hicom 150 H V1.0/Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 3.0). When stations are select-
ed in the table, any relevant call forwarding information for them will be displayed under Call
forwarding or Ringing group on.

7.1.5.2 Area: Call forwarding

Status, Forwarding destination from


One of three call forwarding types may be set in the station. The three types are:
– External
– Internal
– All
The type selected at this station/MULAP is displayed in Status. If forwarding has not been ac-
tivated at that station/MULAP, the status is indicated as Off.
The Forwarding destination from text box lists the stations/MULAPs that are forwarded to
this station/MULAP, if these stations are internal.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-10 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
System-wide

7.1.5.3 Area: Ringing group


All stations to which the station selected earlier in the Stations/MULAP table transferred calls
(Stations included), and stations which also transferred calls to the selected station (Connec-
tion of), are displayed.

Stations included
The user can forward calls to up to five stations. If another station has forwarded calls to this
station, then that station is shown here too.

Connection of
Shows whether or not calls were transferred to this station, and if so, from what device.

See also:
– Section 7.1, “System-wide”, on page 7-2
– Section 7.1.4.2, “Area: Stations/MULAP, Station/MULAP flags”, on page 7-9

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-11
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


System-wide

7.1.6 Line states

System Status | System-wide | Line States

Out of Service can be used to display all station and line ports available in the communication
system. Unavailable lines or lines that are not ready for operation are preceded with an *(as-
terisk), i.e., they are unavailable.

7.1.6.1 Table: Trunks


All trunks available in the communication system are entered in the Trunks table. The line num-
ber is the number assigned to the trunk by the system software. The next number is the slot/
port location within the system. The final number is the dial number for the trunk.
When you select a particular line, the line parameters for that trunk are displayed in the fields
on the right. The values cannot be changed here.

Code
The code number is the number you dial to get access to this specific trunk to place a call.

Trunk
This is the trunk number assigned by the communication system.

Route
The route number shows which of the eight (or sixteen) routes this trunk has been assigned to.

Type
This is the trunk type, such as CO or CO DTMF.

Trunk Type
This is the trunk dialing type, such as Analog or S0. If the trunk is inactive, No Port is displayed
in this field.

Trunk Status
This indicates whether the trunk is currently active or inactive.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-12 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
System-wide

See also:
– Section 7.1, “System-wide”, on page 7-2

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-13
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


System-wide

7.1.7 System texts

System Status | System-wide | System texts

The languages that are currently loaded in the communication system are displayed in System
texts.

7.1.7.1 Table: Available languages


The languages that are currently loaded in the communication system are displayed.
If the CDB was generated offline, a message is displayed instead of the languages.

See also:
– Section 7.1, “System-wide”, on page 7-2

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-14 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
System-wide

7.1.8 UCD Agents

System Status | System-wide | UCD Agents

UCD Agents is used to display the status and number of UCD agents configured in the com-
munication system.

7.1.8.1 Table: UCD Agents Status

Call Number column


The Call number column shows the internal call number of each UCD agent.

Name column
The name assigned to the UCD agent is displayed here.

Status column
Shows the status of the agent.

7.1.8.2 Area: Number of UCD Agents

Total, Available
Shows the total number of configured UCD agents (Total) and the number of available UCD
agents (Available).

See also:
– Section 7.1, “System-wide”, on page 7-2

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-15
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Call charges

7.2 Call charges


System status | Call charges includes the compilation and generation of data records for in-
coming and outgoing calls.

Tabs and Dialog boxes


● Stations (Not in the USA)
● Trunks (Not in the USA)
● Factors (Not in the USA)
● Account codes

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-16 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
Call charges

7.2.1 Stations (Not in the USA)

System Status | Call charges | Stations

The charges incurred per station are displayed under Call charges | Stations.

7.2.1.1 Table: Call detail recording per station


The charge units incurred for each station are displayed in the table.

7.2.1.2 Area: Call charges per station

Export, Delete
Station call charge data can be saved in a separate via Export. The file is saved in a format
which can easily be edited and evaluated using MS Excel, for example.
If an entry in the Call detail recording per line table is marked, the call charges incurred can
be reset via Delete.

See also
– Section 7.2, “Call charges”, on page 7-16

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-17
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Call charges

7.2.2 Trunks (Not in the USA)

System Status | Call charges | Trunks

The charges incurred per trunk are displayed under Call charges | Trunks.

7.2.2.1 Table: CDR per line


The call charges incurred per CO line are totaled in a sum counter.

7.2.2.2 Area: CDR per line

Export, Delete
Line call charge data can be saved in a separate file by using Export. The file is saved in a
format which can easily be edited and evaluated using MS Excel, for example.
If an entry in the CDR per line table is marked, the call charges incurred can be reset via De-
lete.

See also
– Section 7.2, “Call charges”, on page 7-16

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-18 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
Call charges

7.2.3 Factors (Not in the USA)

System Status | Call charges | Factors

Call charge factors per route can be configured under Factors. The accrued counting pulses
are multiplied by the factors (price per counting pulse).

7.2.3.1 Table: Call charge factors per route


Call charge factors per route can be configured in this table.

Column: Multiplier
The AOC information can be provided in call charge units or currency units. Both forms are sup-
ported, but only currency units are displayed. If the information is received in the form of call
charge units, a conversion factor is used. This factor is configurable in order to make call
charge adjustments possible or - if there are several network providers - to make an adjustment
to the providers of the individual location. Even if currency units are provided, the conversion
factor may prove useful for giving the display more clarity.
You can use the Multiplier column to define how received currency amounts are converted to
call charge pulses (division of the currency amount by the multiplier), and how charges to be
transmitted can be converted from call charge pulses to currency amounts (multiplication by
the multiplier).

Column: Multi-ISDN
The conversion factor is entered here. This parameter is only significant for routes (trunks) that
use the CorNet-NQ and QSIG protocols.
You can use the Multi-ISDN column to define how received currency amounts are converted
to call charge pulses (division of the currency amount by the Multi- ISDN), and how charges to
be transmitted can be converted from call charge pulses to currency amounts (multiplication by
the Multi- ISDN).

Column: Currency
This parameter is only significant for routes (trunks) that use the CorNet-NQ and QSIG proto-
cols. This parameter is not applied for other protocols. The preset default setting must be re-
tained in such cases.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-19
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Call charges

You can use the Currency column to define the currency string to be transmitted during trans-
fer to the connected communication system (e.g. EUR). This must be adjusted in line with the
connected communication system. If a currency string is not available, an empty string is trans-
ferred. This can be useful if call charge impulses are to be exchanged or if a standard currency
is used.
Currency string configuration is independent of the currency string shown on the telephone dis-
play.

Column: charges
This parameter is only significant for routes (trunks) that use the CorNet-NQ and QSIG proto-
cols. This parameter is not applied for other protocols. The preset default setting must be re-
tained in such cases.
You can use the charges column to define whether currency charges or call charge pulses are
exchanged on the trunk. If this option is activated, the currency amount is sent and received
(see the column Multi-ISDN). Otherwise, call charge pulses are sent and received. This must
be adjusted in line with the connected communication system.
If call charge pulses are to be exchanged on the route, an empty string should be configured
as the currency.

Column: Advice of charge


This parameter is only significant for routes (trunks) that do not use either the CorNet-NQ or
the QSIG protocol. In other words, it is only applied when the CorNet-NQ/QSIG network has
been exited, e.g. for CO lines or CorNet-N lines.
You can use the Advice of charge column to define whether call charges should be transmit-
ted to the CorNet-NQ/QSIG network, and under what conditions this should occur:
– No charges
No charges are received via this route (e.g. US CO lines)
– Interim
Charges are only received while the connection is active, and not during cleardown.
– Final
Charges are only received after the connection has been cleared down.
– Interim/Final
Charges are received while a connection is active and during connection cleardown.
For CorNet-N routes, advice of charge must be set to Interim/Final if a trunk call can be con-
ducted via this route.

7.2.3.2 Currency
Currency code for the call charge display on telephones.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-20 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
Call charges

7.2.3.3 Computing accuracy


The Computing accuracy parameter should be configured so that the communication sys-
tem’s output and the currency totals transmitted by the ISDN CO have the same number of dig-
its. If the maximum of three decimal points does not suffice, the figure is automatically rounded
off.
The following values are possible:

Computing accuracy Minimum currency total pos- Maximum currency total


sible possible
Via call charge pulse to be selected for routes (lines) with the protocols
CorNet-NQ and QSIG
3 decimal points 1 x 10-3 = 0.001 1 x 10-3 x (232 – 1) =
(for example for the English approx. 4.3 million
Pound Sterling)
2 decimal points 1 x 10-2 = 0.01 1 x 10-2 x (232 – 1) =
approx. 43 million
1 decimal point 1 x 10-1 = 0.1 1 x 10-1 x (232 – 1) =
approx. 430 million
No decimal points 1 x 100 = 1 1 x 100 x (232 – 1) =
approx. 4.3 billion

See also
– Section 7.2, “Call charges”, on page 7-16

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-21
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Call charges

7.2.4 Account codes

System Status | Call charges | Account codes

Account codes (Acc. code) is used to assign call charges the account codes.
A checking procedure allows the communication system to check project codes entered by the
user based on the number of digits entered, or by matching the code against a list that has been
created.
The current units per station are displayed for each station or line in Stations (Not in the USA)
and Trunks (Not in the USA).

7.2.4.1 Area: Checking procedure


You can use Checking procedure to determine whether or not the communication system re-
quires users to enter valid account codes before their calls can be completed. You make your
selection by choosing the appropriate option.

No check
With this selection, the account code is not checked at all. This option is not possible if there
are routes with a mandatory entry procedure. (See also Entry procedure).

List check
With this selection, the account code is checked against a list of account codes that you create.
Only valid entries are accepted (only possible for OfficeCom, OfficePro and HiPath 3300 to
3750).

Check number of characters


With this selection, only the number of characters entered is checked. You determine how
many characters are permitted by using the Characters to be checked list. You can select
from one to eleven.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-22 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
status.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch System Status Menu
Call charges

7.2.4.2 Table: Entry procedure


Entry procedure is used to determine, route by route, whether entering an account code is
optional or mandatory. For each of these you have the option of making account code entry
optional or mandatory. The standard procedure is here Optional.
This item cannot be configured if LCR has been activated. The previous settings are retained.

7.2.4.3 Table: Account code lists


If you select the List Check option in the Checking procedure area, you must create an Ac-
count code list with which the communication system can check the user-entered codes. The
column on the left contains numbers 0 through 999, so you can enter up to 1000 account codes.
Account codes can contain up to eleven digits; alpha characters are not permitted.

Note, however, this terminology may be a little confusing. You can enter up to 1000
7 account codes, each of which is called List 1, List 2, etc. This does not mean, that
you can create 1000 account code lists.

7.2.4.4 Check button


The account codes entered are checked to ensure that they are unique.

See also
– Section 7.2, “Call charges”, on page 7-16

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 7-23
status.fm

System Status Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Call charges

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
7-24 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
extras.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Tools Menu

8 Tools Menu

Run Wizard (HiPath 3000)


Starting the S0 Wizard (HiPath 500)
Table 8-1 Tools Menu

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 8-1
extras.fm

Tools Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Run Wizard (HiPath 3000)

8.1 Run Wizard (HiPath 3000)

Tools | Run Wizard

The Start Wizard menu item enables you to easily perform the initial generation of the commu-
nication system.

The Wizard can also be run more than once. Note that in such cases, the currently
> loaded CDB is taken into account in the Wizard. In other words, all features which
were set up later using HiPath 3000 Manager and which are not handled via the in-
put masks of the Wizard are retained.

See also:
– Section 1.2, “Wizard”, on page 1-8
– Chapter 2, “Operation”
– Section 5.8.1, “Transfer | Communication”, on page 5-12

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
8-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
extras.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Tools Menu
Starting the S0 Wizard (HiPath 500)

8.2 Starting the S0 Wizard (HiPath 500)

Tools | Run S0 Wizard

The Wizard provides a guided dialog for entering the most important customer data. The cus-
tomer data that is needed for an initial startup is collected here and then transferred to the cus-
tomer database (CDB) of the HiPath 500. Please note, however, that the Wizard only collects
the most important customer data that is needed for a fast startup. Detailed entries can be pro-
cessed later in HiPath 3000 Manager.

During the initial setup, the Wizard deletes the standard key assignment of the first
> optiPoint. This was originally configured as an Attendant and now has the standard
keys of a normal optiPoint 500.

The Wizard is automatically activated on initial installation.

If the Wizard is not called automatically at the first installation or was canceled for
> some reason, make sure that you start it manually.

Make sure that all terminals (system telephones or CMI devices) are connected before starting
the Wizard.

Once you have started the Wizard, follow the instructions displayed on the user interface and
note the following description:
1. The pre-defined data is now HiPath transferred to the HiPath 500. If you receive an error
message, check if
– the HiPath 500 is operational,
– the administration PC is connected to HiPath 500 via an operational serial interface or
the LIM.
2. The PCPBX-Point-to-multipoint connection type is set by default. The telecommunica-
tion provider generally supplies three MSN (CO numbers) for each S0 port. In accordance
with the available HiPath 500, one or two ISDN connections can be used for connecting to
the public network.
3. Under Options, specify if you have a LAN connection and if you want to enter the IP setup
at a later stage.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 8-3
extras.fm

Tools Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Starting the S0 Wizard (HiPath 500)

Entering the MAC and IP addresses


If If you did not select the Skip IP setup option:
4. Enter the MAC address as described in the note in the dialog.
5. Enter the IP address and, if necessary, change the predefined subnet mask.

Configuring access
6. Select how the data should be transferred between HiPath 500 and the PC. After specify-
ing an IP address, also select access via the LAN.
7. Then start the transfer of the CDB from the HiPath 500 communication system to your PC.

8. Once the Wizard has been completed, additional settings can be implemented in order to
optimize the communication system to best meet your needs. You can do this for the com-
munication system settings by using the functions of the System view. For customized set-
tings, you will need to switch to the Station view (see also Chapter 2, “Operation”).
9. Once you have created the customer data, it is transferred back to the (see Transfer |
Communication).
Your communication system is now operational.

The Wizard can also be run more than once. Note that in such cases, the currently
> loaded CDB is taken into account in the Wizard. In other words, all features which
were set up later using HiPath 3000 Manager and which are not handled via the in-
put masks of the Wizard are retained.

See also
– Section 1.2, “Wizard”, on page 1-8
– Chapter 2, “Operation”
– Section 5.8.1, “Transfer | Communication”, on page 5-12

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
8-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
options.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Options Menu

9 Options Menu

Program Options
Password Level
Change Password
Table 9-1 Options Menu

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 9-1
options.fm

Options Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Options

9.1 Program Options

Options | Program options

The Options/Program options dialog is used to set general program options for the HiPath
3000 Manager such as the language of the user interface, the paths for files to be saved, mo-
dem settings and ISDN parameters.

Tabs
● Program options General
● Program options Save options
● Program options Communication
● Program options ISDN

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
9-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
options.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Options Menu
Program Options

9.1.1 Program options General

Options | Program options | General

The General tab can be used to set the general program options for the HiPath 3000 Manager
such as the user interface language.

9.1.1.1 Area: Select language


This feature allows you to determine which language is used for the HiPath 3000 Manager.

9.1.1.2 Area: Language conversion


The options Latin, Greek or Cyrillic define which character set should be used in the commu-
nication system for the texts to be loaded. The distinction is necessary because these three PC
character sets overlap in the upper 128 bytes of the ASCII character set. By selecting the option
Greek, for example, a Greek info text about HiPath 3000 Manager can be loaded into a com-
munication system with Greek country code running under the Russian version of Windows.

When doing this, the destination character set may not match the PC character set
7 used by the operating system (Windows 95, etc.). This means that the input charac-
ters cannot necessarily be displayed by the PC character set being used. This does
not have any implications for the conversion tool used.

See also:
– Section 9.1, “Program Options”, on page 9-2
– Section 9.1.2, “Program options Save options”, on page 9-4
– Section 9.1.3, “Program options Communication”, on page 9-7
– Section 9.1.4, “Program options ISDN”, on page 9-10

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 9-3
options.fm

Options Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Options

9.1.2 Program options Save options

Options | Program options | Save options

Save Options can be used to set the paths for saving files.

9.1.2.1 Areas: Automatic File Creation, File Name


These settings are used to set the options for saving the CDB and other files.

ASCII File The ASCII file contains the station and trunk capacity of the communication
system in tabular form. It can be used as an interface file for other network
management tools.
If the switch is activated, a file is created with the name of the CDB and the
extension .txt.
Log File A log file is created in any case.
If the switch is activated, the file is created automatically for the changes made
via the HiPath 3000 Manager. (Delta Log File)
The number of log files can be changed via the ini file.To do this, change the
value for "MaxLogFile=20" under the "General Settings" section of the ini file.
Between 1 and 999 log files can be created. The standard entry is 999 log files.
The file name depends on the access of the communication system. The same
mechanism is used as for the CDB. If the access is ISDN, for example, the
name consists of the call number, the numbering (001 = current log file) and
the ending LOG (for example, call number = 879, log file: "879.001.log").
If the switch isn’t activated, you will be prompted for the name of the LOG file
after the data has been transferred. If the dialog box is terminated, the LOG file
is created with the name "Delta.log".
Last Load If the switch is activated, a CDB loaded from a communication system is al-
ways named lastload.kds by default.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
9-4 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
options.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Options Menu
Program Options

Customer If this switch is activated, each CDB loaded from the communication system is
name generated using the customer name entered in the "Customer name" field un-
der "Settings | System Parameters | System settings".
Example: A customer called SIEMENS is generated as SIEMENS.kds.
Note: If the "Customer name" field is empty, the name is set to the default last-
load.kds.
Counter If this switch is activated, each CDB that is loaded from the communication
system is provided with a sequential counter: "Customer name".001.kds. 001
is always the most recent CDB.
Depending on the access method, the customer name is as follows:
– Access via V.24: direct
– Access via IP: 139.255.255.255
– Access via ISDN/IMOD: 02302667879
Counter and This is the combination of the last load and counter, and the default CDB is
Last Load then named lastload.001.kds.
Copies If the counter reaches the number of copies, the CDB counting starts again at
zero.
If option Lastload or option Customer name is active for Filename, the storage options are
fixed and cannot be altered.

9.1.2.2 Area: Save options for paths


These settings are used to set the paths for saving the CDB and other files. You can select the
appropriate path in each case via ....

Path for CDB Path for saving and opening the CDB file (only when using the Save
as and Open customer database functions).
Note: If the Save customer database function is used, the CDB is al-
ways saved under the following path: C:\Documents and Settings\Us-
er\Application Data\Siemens\Manager E
Path for ASCII Path for saving the ASCII file
Path for LOG Path for saving the delta log file

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 9-5
options.fm

Options Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Options

ARP Request
(only for communication systems with connected V.24E COM server)
If this option is activated, an entry is made in the local ARP table of the PCs. The IP address
under "IP Parameter/IP Interface” is linked with the MAC address of the communication sys-
tem. The automatic update of the local ARP table makes initial configuration of the V.24E eas-
ier.

See also:
– Section 9.1, “Program Options”, on page 9-2
– Section 9.1.1, “Program options General”, on page 9-3
– Section 9.1.3, “Program options Communication”, on page 9-7
– Section 9.1.4, “Program options ISDN”, on page 9-10

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
9-6 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
options.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Options Menu
Program Options

9.1.3 Program options Communication

Options | Program options | Communication

The Communication mask allows you to set parameters for the modem that connects your PC
to the communication system (if you are using a modem).

9.1.3.1 Area: Modem Settings


The communication system will automatically assign the remaining values in the Modem Set-
tings area after you have selected the Modem Type. When selecting New Modem as the mo-
dem type, the values must be entered manually.

The modem tested for the US is the US Robotics Sportster Flash.


>
Modem Type
The Modem type list can be used to select the defined modem types via the ini file.
When selecting New Modem as the modem type, the values must be entered manually.

9.1.3.2 Area: Modem control

Dialing
The suffix for the CO seizure code is entered via Dialing.
This parameter may be set for
– 1) the pulse dialing procedure ATDP (Attention Dial Pulse) or
– 2) the tone dialing procedure ATDT (Attention Dial Tone).
The default for all of the listed modem types is ATDT.Amtsbelegungskennziffer

Hang up
The command for switching the modem to command mode is entered here. The command en-
tered under Hang up is transmitted one second after this command has been sent to the mo-
dem. This command should allow the modem to hang up. The standard value must, as a rule,
not be changed.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 9-7
options.fm

Options Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Options

Reset
The initialization command for the modem is entered here.

Init
The modem command that sets the modem to the required mode is entered here. The standard
modem commands are preset. If you select one of the modem types listed in the Modem types
list, this parameter will be set automatically. If you select the New Modem entry, you must enter
the appropriate init string manually.
If the modem is to create a connection over a communications server, the parameter X3 in the
init string must be included. It causes the modem to make a connection without a continuous
dial tone.

Automatic answering must be deactivated for the PC modem (the factory setting of
> fax modems is usually set to automatic answering by default).
Depending on the modem installed, the init string should changed to AT&FS0=0.

9.1.3.3 Area: Modem answer

Connection
This is the modem answer that is expected after a successful connection setup.

Busy
This is the modem answer that is expected if no connection is set up. As a rule, the default val-
ue does not need to be modified.

9.1.3.4 Area: Timers

Dialing
This parameter defines how long the modem will wait for the connection before it redials. This
value depends on the basic configuration of the modem and the dialing method. Valid values
range from 0 to 999 seconds. The default, appropriate for most circumstances, is 40 seconds.

Redial Pause
This parameter defines the length of the pause between dialing attempts. Valid values range
from 0 to 999 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
9-8 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
options.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Options Menu
Program Options

Number Redial
This parameter defines how many times the system should attempt to dial the number. Valid
values range from 0 to 999 times. The default is 10 times.

Release at
This parameter defines the time after which the connection between the PC and the communi-
cation system is automatically released. The release time begins on completing the adminis-
tration activity. The valid range is between 60 and 9999 seconds. If the value 0 is entered, then
the connection is not automatically released depending on the time.

9.1.3.5 Area: Interface

Port
The Port drop-down list box is used to select the COM port number (COM 1 to COM 4) and to
thus notify HiPath 3000 Manager to which port the connection cable to the communication sys-
tem is attached or, in the case of a modem connection, which port is used by the modem. The
default is COM 1.

Baud Rate
The appropriate baud rate is selected here. The default setting is 9600.
It is important that the baud rate set here matches the baud rate in the communication system.

9.1.3.6 Area: Own MSN (CAPI 2.0)


In the case of a CAPI 2.0 connection, the MSN (Multiple Subscriber Number) of the port at
which the PC ISDN card is connected is entered in this field.

9.1.3.7 Area: HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server


Name or IP address of the server on which the DB Feature Server is installed. This entry is the
default setting for the Transfer | HiPath 5000 RSM/AllServe Server dialog.

See also:
– Section 9.1, “Program Options”, on page 9-2
– Section 9.1.1, “Program options General”, on page 9-3
– Section 9.1.2, “Program options Save options”, on page 9-4
– Section 9.1.4, “Program options ISDN”, on page 9-10

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 9-9
options.fm

Options Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Program Options

9.1.4 Program options ISDN

Options | Program options | ISDN

ISDN is used to set the parameters for ISDN.


For SIRA environments HiPath 3000 Manager supports the "Remote Multi CAPI" function, i.e.
several controllers (Bintec® router) can be connected using a Windows Terminal Server. See
System Description.

9.1.4.1 Area: MSN Mapping


The options configured in this area only apply if a PC ISDN card which supports a CAPI Version
1.1 interface is used.
CAPI Version 2.0 is supported by default by standard ISDN cards.

MSN mask 0-9


If the PC ISDN card supports CAPI Version 1.1, up to 10 MSN (Multiple Subscriber Numbers)
can be configured in the driver software of the ISDN card. These are used to identify the card
in the case of incoming calls. The same MSN must also be activated in the HiPath 3000 Man-
ager.

With a CAPI 2.0 connection, the MSN ports to which the PC ISDN card is connected
> must be entered under Program options Communication.

Global Call
All activated MSN in the "MSN Mapping" (MSN Mask 0 to MSN Mask 9) of the ISDN card are
addressed.

9.1.4.2 Area: Call charges


If KDS (customer database) or APS files are transferred (if call charge pulsing is released), the
costs incurred are displayed in the Transmission dialog.

Multiplier
The call charge multiplier (e.g., 6) is entered under Multiplier.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
9-10 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
options.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Options Menu
Program Options

Currency
The national currency is entered under Currency.

See also:
– Section 9.1, “Program Options”, on page 9-2
– Section 9.1.1, “Program options General”, on page 9-3
– Section 9.1.2, “Program options Save options”, on page 9-4
– Section 9.1.3, “Program options Communication”, on page 9-7

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 9-11
options.fm

Options Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Password Level

9.2 Password Level

Options | Password level

Options/Password level can be used to enter the user data for identification and authentica-
tion on starting HiPath 3000 Manager (see also Password level and Start and Log-on).

Since the user names and passwords are in the communication system and not in
> the application, the entered data is not checked immediately, but only when a con-
nection to the communication system is made.
This also means that you can start an action that will be broken off after the check
because you do not have the necessary rights.

User name
Input field for the user name (as of Hicom 150 E Office) which identifies the user.

Password
Input field for the password, used for user authentication.

Group chip card


<currently without any function>

Indiv. chip card


<currently without any function>

See also:
– Section 1.1.4, “Password level”, on page 1-7
– Chapter 3, “ Start and Log-on”

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
9-12 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
options.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Options Menu
Change Password

9.3 Change Password

Options | Change password

Options/Change password is used to change a HiPath 3000 Manager password (no longer
relevant as of Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 2.0).
You can use this dialog box to change the default password provided with the communication
system. You must first enter the old password followed by the new password, and then verify
the new password. As a security measure, none of the characters that you type appear on the
screen. You will see only asterisks.

If you change the password, you will be the only person who knows what the new
7 password is. You cannot reset a password that has been forgotten.

See also:
– Section 9.2, “Password Level”, on page 9-12

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 9-13
options.fm

Options Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Change Password

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
9-14 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
applic.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Applications Menu

10 Applications Menu
The Applications menu enables you to create shortcuts for the applications that you use often
and then start these applications from there.

Creating a shortcut
The existing shortcuts (Windows 95 and later) are used for this function. For example, you can
find shortcuts to programs on your Windows Desktop and on the Start bar in the Programs
folder.
You can also create your own shortcuts for a program in Windows Explorer.
1. Open Windows Explorer from the Start bar.
2. Look for the program for which you want to create a shortcut. Click with the right mouse
button on the program file (*.exe).
3. From the context menu, select Create shortcut.
4. The shortcut is created (Shortcut to ...).
5. Click with the right mouse button on Shortcut to ....
6. Select Cut or Copy from the context menu.
7. In Windows-Explorer, open the following program folder of HiPath 3000 Manager:
e.g. C:\Programs \Siemens \HiPath 3000 Manager E \Application
If you selected some other folder during the installation, open that folder.
8. With the right mouse button, click in the Application folder and select Paste from the con-
text menu.
9. You can rename the shortcut at any time. You can also learn how to create shortcuts in the
Windows Help:
Start | Help, Find tab, search term Shortcut.

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 10-1
applic.fm

Applications Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
10-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
help.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Help Menu

11 Help Menu

Help Topics
Using Help
Info
Table 11-1 Help Menu

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation 11-1
help.fm

Help Menu Nur für den internen Gebrauch


Help Topics

11.1 Help Topics

Help | Help topics


F1 key

Opens this Help.

11.2 Using Help

Help | Using Help

Opens the Using Help topic.

11.3 Info

Help | About...

Opens the About... dialog box, which shows the following details about the program:
– Program name
– Version number
– Company
– Copyright
– Supported communication systems

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
11-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
asseIX.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Index

Index Z Delta mode 1-4


Digit Transmission 6-34
Digit-by-digit 6-34
Drag & drop 2-11
A E
Account codes 7-22 E-mail notification 5-27
Administration area 2-9 Emergency 6-26
AllServe 5-2 En-bloc sending 6-34
Applications 10-1 Entry Voice Mail 6-123
AutoAttendant 6-116, 6-128 EVM 6-123
Automatic attendant 6-116, 6-128 Exit 5-50
Automatic call forwarding 5-29
F
B F1 key 2-15
Button bar 2-10 Factors 7-19
C File types 1-9
Flags 7-9
Calendar 6-118
Flags and COS 6-33
Call charges 7-16
Forwarding 7-10
Call destination lists 6-52
Call forwarding G
allocation int./ext. calls 6-52 General 9-3
CAPS 2-11 General procedure 1-4
Cards 7-3 Greeting selection 6-103
CDB 1-10 Groups/hunt groups 6-56
Central distribution list 6-120
Change password 9-13 H
Class of service per station 6-33 Hardware version station 6-24
Click and drag 2-11 Help 2-15
Close 5-9 Help topics 11-2
CMI 6-28 HiPath 5000 Server 5-2
Common Greeting Mailbox 6-123
Communication 5-12, 9-7 I
Context menu 2-12 Info 2-11, 11-2
Context-sentive help 2-15 Installation 1-11
Copying entries 2-11 Invoking help 2-15
Cordless 6-28 ISDN 9-10
COS 5-25, 5-26 IVM 5-18
Creating a shortcut 10-1 IVM calendar 6-103
Customer 1-5 IVM Version 2 5-20
Customer database 1-10
L
D Label 6-23
Daylight saving time/DISA 6-93 LCR 6-32
Deleting entries 2-11 activate 6-33
A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation Z-1
asseIX.fm

Index Nur für den internen Gebrauch

authorization codes 6-33 Save options 9-4


flags 6-33 Security 1-5
Least Cost Routing 6-32 Select language 9-3
Line states 7-12 Selection according to call type 5-24
Loadware 7-5 Server 5-2
Service 1-5
M Settings 1-7
Mailbox configuration 5-20 Small Remote Sites 6-26
Menu bar 2-4 Software version 6-24
Message call 5-23 Sorting tables 2-13
Mobile telephone 6-30 SRS concept 6-26
Modem settings 9-7 Starting the Wizard 8-2
MSN 6-10 Startup and log on 3-1
MULAP groups 6-64 Station parameters 4-3
Station selection 2-7, 2-8, 4-2
N Station view 4-1
Navigation tree 2-7 Stations 7-17
Net view 2-7 Hardware version 6-24
NUM 2-11 Software version 6-24
Status bar 2-11
O
Substitute 5-24
Open 5-5 Substitute mailbox 4-10
P Supported communication systems 11-2
System 7-6
Password 3-1
System expansion hardware 7-4
Password level 1-7, 9-12
System expansion software 7-4
Paths 9-4
System texts 7-14
Print 5-10, 6-23
System view, Station view 2-7
Print preview 5-10
System-wide 7-2
Printer options 5-10
Printer setup 5-10 T
Printing 5-10 Table handling 2-13
Procedure 1-4 Tables
Program options 9-2 changing column width 2-14
Program window 2-2 changing entries 2-13
Protocol 5-48 Tabs bar 2-9
R Toolbar 2-5
Trace Settings 5-39
Read/write database 1-4
Transfer 5-2, 5-11
Recording quality 6-127
Trunks 7-18
Recycle bin icon 2-11
Type of number 6-45
S
U
Save 5-7
Uninstallation 1-11
Save as 5-8
User administration 1-5, 5-46
A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
Z-2 HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation
asseIX.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch Index

User group 1-5


User name 1-5, 3-1
Using help 11-2

V
Version number 11-2

W
Wizard 1-8

A31003-H3580-M101-7-76A9, 09-2010
HiPath 3000/5000 Manager C, Administrator documentation Z-3

You might also like